JP2024061909A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board. The game board includes: a primary flow path for allowing game balls to enter a variable winning through gate 85 for imparting a primary profit to a player; a tertiary flow path for allowing game balls to enter a lower operation port 26 and an out port 28 for imparting a tertiary profit smaller than the primary profit to a player; and rotary distribution means 82 that has an operation state allowing game balls to flow down to the primary flow path and a non-operation state allowing game balls to flow down to the tertiary flow path, and is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined operation condition. The primary flow path and the tertiary flow path have mutually different surfaces for forming flow paths in front and rear directions of the game board.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 74

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a number of pictures are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static manner and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls by, for example, transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is equipped with a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, a starting ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming board, and a gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, and the gaming board is equipped with a first ball entry means for enabling the gaming ball to enter a first ball entry area that gives a first benefit to the player. The game machine is provided with a flow path, a tertiary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a tertiary entry area that gives a player a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit, and an operating member that has an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down the primary flow path and an inactive state that allows the game ball to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, and is characterized in that the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow path in the front-to-back direction of the game board.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; Front view of the game board FIG. 1 shows a display screen of a pattern display device. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning/losing table that stores the random number values that will result in a big win. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots. FIG. 1 shows a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. FIG. 1 shows a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 1 shows a flowchart of main processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening the large prize opening; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the open/close execution mode is ended. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device. A diagram showing the contents of the sub-side reservation information storage area A block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio/light emission control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation determination process; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. A diagram showing a notice reserved pattern, a normal reserved pattern, and a special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance. A diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a reference embodiment A of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; A diagram showing a notice reserved pattern, a normal reserved pattern, and a special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance pattern. A diagram showing the flow of pre-reading performance A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a second reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area, a first reservation shift process is executed, and then it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance pattern according to a reference form B of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a second reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance pattern according to a reference embodiment C of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the performance for consuming the special hold is terminated, and the performance for consuming the advance hold is executed. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment D of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its surroundings Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that lead to guideways FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball hits the revolving door. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes to fall into a game area. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to the embodiment E of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its surroundings Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that lead to guideways FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the protruding portion. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes to fall into a game area. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to the embodiment F of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its surroundings Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to the embodiment G of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its surroundings Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the reference embodiment H of the present invention. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes to fall into a game area. Front view of a game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention. An enlarged front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the lower right game means. A magnified view of the Kluhn from above A diagram showing the Klune guidance state when the rotating body is rotated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a starting port induction state in which the rotating body is rotated. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots. Flowchart of timer interrupt processing FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning process for an open prize. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance. FIG. 1 shows a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device before a special game is executed. FIG. 1 shows a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device when a special game is being played. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention; A diagram showing the state of the Kluun guidance when the moving body is moved A diagram showing the starting gate guidance state after the moving body is moved FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the crown by the rotary distribution means. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the opening start hole by the rotation distribution means. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance. 11 is a front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention; An enlarged front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the lower right game means. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine FIG. 1 shows a flowchart of normal processing. A diagram showing the opening amount of the opening and closing door of the operation winning device.

[Reference form]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a type of gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front (front side) of the outer frame 11.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right sides as the support side, a front door frame 121 arranged in front of the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right sides as the support side, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable backward with one of the left and right sides as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is equipped with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 121 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame. These locked states are released by using an unlocking key to perform an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 13, which is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The front door frame 121 has a generally elliptical window portion 122 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 fitted into the window portion 122. Note that in this embodiment, the window panel 123 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but it may be formed of synthetic resin or the like and is colorless and transparent.
In addition, the front door frame 121 is equipped with an indicator lamp section 124 provided above the window section 122 as part of a light-emitting means composed of various lamp sections etc. provided around the window section 122, speaker sections 125 provided on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp section 124 and outputting sound effects etc. according to the game status, and an upper bulge section 14 and a lower bulge section 15 provided below the window section 122.

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are arranged side by side one above the other and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulge 14 has an upper tray 141 provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 141 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed by a dispenser 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4) while aligning them in a row.
The lower bulge 15 also has a lower tray 151 provided on the inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 151 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 141.

The front door frame 121 further includes a launch handle 16 serving as a launching means provided to the right of the lower tray 151. This launch handle 16 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 1 to launch game balls from a game ball launching mechanism 49 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. The launch handle 16 changes the amount of rotation to change the launch strength of the game balls launched toward the game area, i.e., the momentum of the launch.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
2, the game board 2 has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned play area is formed on the game board 2 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire play area can be viewed from the front through the window portion 122.
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls into the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 when the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the top of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit portion is located on one side of the play area and faces the upper center of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16 by the player increases. In this reference form, the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is provided on the left side of the play area.

The game board 2 has a number of openings, large and small, formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The game board 2 also has a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry section) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry section) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28, which are provided at each opening. The game board 2 also has through gates 31 provided on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided in the center, and the like. Furthermore, the game board 2 has a number of nails NL planted in the game area to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, various components (gimmicks) such as windmills, etc.

Each of the various winning openings of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with a detection sensor 301-304 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and these detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with a detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with a detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with a detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with a detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. The detection sensors 301-304 may be any type that can individually detect the entry of a game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball enters the general winning port 24. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball enters the upper operating port 25 and if a ball enters the lower operating port 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball enters the variable winning device 27. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each operating port 25, 26 may be different.

The outlet 28 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2. Game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the outlet 28. The outlet 28 also has a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 4) that detects game balls entering the game area, and this detection sensor 305 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the case where the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area, but also the case where the game ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the game ball entering the outlet 28, the entry of the game ball into the various winning ports is also referred to as "winning". Also, the entry of the ball into the through gate 31 refers to the game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area. The entry of the ball into this through gate 31 is also referred to as "winning", just like the entry of the ball into the various winning ports.

The upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26 are unitized as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 2. Each actuation port 25, 26 opens upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with the upper actuation port 25 located at the top and the lower actuation port 26 located at the bottom. The lower actuation port 26 has an electric device 261 as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric role 261 is connected to an electric role drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This electric role 261 is set to either a closed state (unsupported state or unguided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric role drive unit 262. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric role 261 closer to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is opened by moving the upper ends of the electric role 261 away from each other in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric role 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top end of the electric role 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric role 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top end of the electric role 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric role 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26.

In addition, instead of the closed state and open state described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state) and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Also, the lower operating port 26 may be configured to perform such switching by displacement of the lower operating port 26, rather than by setting the electric device 261, and in this case, the lower operating port 26 does not need to be equipped with the electric device 261.

The variable winning device 27 is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter the game, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the game ball to the right by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum extent, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27.

Here, the game board 2 is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The big prize opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. As described above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of game balls. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the large prize opening 271. This opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to close the opening of the large prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and sinks into the game board 2 to open the opening of the large prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the opening/closing execution mode, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter the opening/closing execution mode.
The opening and closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state and game balls can enter the large prize opening 271. In the opening and closing execution mode, the period from when the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state until it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a display section for gadgets 35, and is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on the front side of the main display device 32. That is, the main display device 32 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. Also, the distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from causing the game ball to fall between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery based on winning the upper operating port 25, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery based on winning the lower operating port 26 (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of rounds played in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is activated (or when the opening/closing execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes the varying display of the pattern using the winning of the upper operating port 25 as a trigger, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 as the stopping result of the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays the predetermined stopping result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening and closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes the varying display of the pattern using the winning of the lower operation port 26 as a trigger, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the lower operation port 26 as the stopping result of the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening and closing execution mode.

The device display unit 35 executes a changing display of the image when a winning entry is made at each through gate 31, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry at each through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to an electric role open state, the device display unit 35 displays a predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to an electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric device 261 provided at the lower operating port 26 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the gadget display unit 35 are configured with segment displays, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix, etc. In addition, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the gadget display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple colors that are switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36 that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) patterns, which are a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 arranged to surround the pattern display device 36. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge towards the window panel 123 provided on the front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as reduced visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The pattern display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This pattern display device 36 starts displaying a variable pattern based on the winning of the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. That is, when the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display in the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display accordingly.
It should be noted that the pattern display device 36 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The center frame 37 includes a first hold lamp section 371 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, a second hold lamp section 372 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a third hold lamp section 373 provided in the upper area of the pattern display device 36.

The first reserved lamp section 371 is a section that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This first reserved lamp section 371 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display section 341 and the symbol display device 36.
The second reserved lamp section 372 is a section that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This second reserved lamp section 372 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third reserved lamp section 373 is a section that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This third reserved lamp section 373 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the gadget display section 35.
In addition, each of the reservation lamp sections 371 to 373 may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 36 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
The display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three display areas as shown in Fig. 3, and in each display area, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3 are displayed in order from the left. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging eight types of symbols consisting of the numbers "1" to "8" in ascending order from bottom to top, with "1" following "8". In Fig. 3, the center line of each display area is indicated by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 36 starts a variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26, thereby executing a performance for a game round on the display screen G. This performance for a game round switches from a variable display to a static display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the center symbol row Z2, and finally ends with a predetermined symbol being statically displayed on the pay line L.
In other words, a game round refers to the period from when the main display unit 34 and the symbol display unit 36 start to display a varying display based on winning at each operating port 25, 26 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 36 is not limited to this and can be any manner. For example, the number of pattern rows, the direction of scrolling of each pattern row, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, instead of the pattern of only numbers, the pattern of each pattern row may be a combination of pictures and numbers, or may be a pattern of only pictures.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 4, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, a sound and light emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 is also equipped with a payout control device 46 and a power supply and launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to make the payout device 48 described above pay out game balls. The power supply and launch control device 47 executes launch control to make the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above launch game balls.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control of the game (main control) and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 includes a board box that houses the main control board 41 and the like. This board box may be equipped with a trace means that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be a configuration in which a board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and a joining part (crimping part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when each case body is separated is provided, or a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesion target when peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundaries between multiple case bodies. In addition, the trace structure may be a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 which constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is an element which combines, on a chip, the ROM 43, the RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit acting as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to the multiple detection sensors 301 to 306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light emission control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric role drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, the main display unit 34, and the role display unit 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the drive of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the drive of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. In each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of the internal lottery based on the winning of each operation port 25, 26. Furthermore, the MPU 42 controls the display of the role display unit 35 to display the results of the internal lottery based on the winning of each through gate 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and a power supply/launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-306 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27, the out opening 28, and each through gate 31. The MPU 42 performs winning judgments (ball winning judgments) for the various winning openings, the out opening 28, and each through gate 31 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-306. The MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning judgment for the upper operating opening 25 or the lower operating opening 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players when playing) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, the payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is equipped with a power supply unit for use during power outages, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use during power outages supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4 even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply/launch control device 47 also executes launch control to cause the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply/launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch the game balls.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in the MPU of the main control device>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in Fig. 5, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to draw the jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 to draw the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs, and the reach random number counter C3 to draw whether or not to generate a reach display. The MPU 42 also uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration time in the main display unit 34 and the pattern display unit 36. Furthermore, the MPU 42 uses the electric role release counter C4 to draw whether or not to open the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 441 (see Fig. 4) of the RAM 44.

Each time the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and the counters are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 44. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 (see FIG. 4) provided as an acquired information storage means in RAM 44 when a game ball enters the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role release counter C4 is stored in the electric role reserved area 443 (see FIG. 4) of RAM 44 when a game ball enters each through gate 31.

The reserved ball storage area 442 includes a reserved area Ra for the first result display section, a reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display reserve area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas, the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information in each area Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order according to the entry of the game ball into the upper actuation port 25. Specifically, when the upper actuation port 25 is entered multiple times in succession, the MPU 42 stores the reserved information in chronological order in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4.

In this way, the first result display section reserve area Ra has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be reserved in the upper operating port 25. The first result display section reserve area Ra also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved balls stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reserved items related to the upper operating port 25 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other multiples such as two, three, or five or more, or may be single.

The second result display reserve area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means has four storage areas, the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 has a storage capacity that can store a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order according to the entry of the game ball into the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, when the entry into the lower actuation port 26 occurs multiple times in succession, the MPU 42 stores the reserved information in chronological order in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4.

In this way, the second result display section reserve area Rb has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be reserved in the lower operating port 26. The second result display section reserve area Rb also has a memory area for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserved items related to the lower operating port 26 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other multiples such as two, three, or five or more, or may be single.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the pending information stored in the memory area of the first result display unit pending area Ra or the second result display unit pending area Rb when starting the changing display of each result display unit 341, 342.

The electric winning reserve area 443 has four memory areas, similar to the reserve area Ra for the first result display section and the reserve area Rb for the second result display section. Therefore, up to four winning balls can be reserved in each through gate 31.
In addition, the number of reserved gates for each through gate 31 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other multiples such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
Each counter will be described in detail below.
First, the electric role release counter C4 will be described. The electric role release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 250.
The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44 via a lottery counter buffer at the timing when a gaming ball enters each through gate 31.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (electric role release lottery) to determine whether or not to put the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26 into an electric role release state based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 443.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes that differ from each other in the frequency with which the electric role 261 is set to the open state to allow game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric role 261 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric role 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role opening state is won, the electric role 261 is set to the open state more times and the opening time of each time the electric role 261 is set to the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric role 261 to the closed state during each opening in one electric role opening state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time secured as the waiting time between the end of the electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery (the duration of one variable display on the role display unit 35) is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the lower actuation port 26 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player hits the ball to the left with a medium rotation amount of the launch handle 16, and the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area is shifted from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the upper actuation port 25 rather than the lower actuation port 26. In the high frequency support mode, the player hits the ball to the right with a maximum rotation amount of the launch handle 16, and the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area is shifted from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the lower actuation port 26 rather than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many game balls.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a left-hand hitting route (first path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25 and harder for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26, and a right-hand hitting route (second path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 and harder for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25.

The configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, multiple types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short securing time compared to the low-frequency support mode, and may be configured to shorten the average of the selected securing time. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric role 261 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency of setting the electric role 261 to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the jackpot random number counter C1. For example, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after it reaches a maximum value of 599, it returns to 0, making it a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599. Furthermore, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one loop, it reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that point in time as its initial value. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, just like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a win/lose table that stores the random number values that will result in a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number value that will result in a jackpot is stored as a hit/miss table (hit/miss information group) in a hit/miss table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of ROM 43, which is provided as a hit/miss information group storage means, as shown in Figure 6.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two winning/losing lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. The winning/losing table includes a winning/losing table for the low probability mode (low probability winning/losing information group) shown in Fig. 6(a) and a winning/losing table for the high probability mode (high probability winning/losing information group) shown in Fig. 6(b).
The MPU 42 compares these winning/losing tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot.

These winning/losing tables have the results of the lottery (winning/losing results) for the occurrence of multiple jackpots, including a "jackpot win," a "special losing result," and a "normal losing result."
Specifically, in a gaming state in which the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, there are two random number values that result in a "jackpot win," as shown in Figure 6(a).
In contrast, in a gaming state in which the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 6(b), the random number values for a "jackpot win" are 21. Here, the random number values for a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode are included in the random number values for a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each hit/miss table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode only needs to have a higher probability of "winning the jackpot" compared to the low probability mode. The value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode does not need to include the value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, and may include a portion of the value of the random number that results in a "winning the jackpot" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each win/lose lottery mode, any random number value other than the "jackpot win" will not result in a jackpot and will result in a loss.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of failure results: a "special failure result (small win result)" and a "normal failure result." These failure results are common in that neither of them triggers a transition to the win/lose lottery mode or the support mode. However, they are different in that the "special failure result" triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal failure result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the big win type counter C2 will be described. The big win type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 29.
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the type of the jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for each type of big win.
The random number values related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of a ROM 43 provided as an allocation information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 7. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(b).
The MPU 42 compares these allocation tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table which is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which has been shifted from the reserve area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is based on an entry into the upper operating port 25.
As shown in Fig. 7(a), the first allocation table allocates a number of allocation results, including "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit few rounds high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", "explicit few rounds high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result", "10 to 14" is allocated to "non-explicit few rounds high probability result", "15 to 19" is allocated to "explicit few rounds high probability result", and "20 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result".

The second allocation table is a table which is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which has been shifted from the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is based on an entry into the lower operating port 26.
As shown in Fig. 7(b), the second allocation table allocates two allocation results, "low probability result" and "most favorable result". Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to the "low probability result" and "10 to 29" is allocated to the "most favorable result".

Each allocation result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) A winning/losing lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (2) A support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (3) A state of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, the differences in the winning/losing selection modes (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low probability mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result", "explicit few rounds high probability result", and "best result" are distribution results in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the open/close execution mode ends. This high probability mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win".

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of times of play reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning or losing lottery results in a "jackpot win".
The "high probability result with fewer rounds" and the "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

The differences in the manner in which the variable winning device 27 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by, for example, adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 238.
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when the gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when the gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when the gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss result" rather than a "jackpot win."
Specifically, when the lottery results in a "normal miss" rather than a "jackpot win," the MPU 42 compares the reach table with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and generates the reach display if the lottery results in the reach display being generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the generation of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 (see FIG. 4).

Here, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result," the pattern display device 36 displays a combination of patterns having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as a stop result on the valid line L. Also, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the pattern display device 36 displays a combination of patterns having the same even numbers as a stop result on the valid line L. Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "non-expressed low round high probability result" or "expressed low round high probability result," or if the winning/losing lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win," the pattern display device 36 displays a combination of special patterns (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the winning/losing lottery, instead of a combination of patterns having the same numbers, as a stop result on the valid line L.

The reach display occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a combination of symbols with the same numbers is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result" or "low probability result") regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, the reach display does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a special combination of symbols is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "non-disclosed low round high probability result" or "disclosed low round high probability result" or the allocation lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win" in the win/loss lottery).

The reach display mode is such that, among the multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, some of the pattern rows (e.g., pattern row Z1 and pattern row Z3) are displayed as stopped on the activated line L, thereby displaying a combination of the same patterns to suggest the stopped result, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows (e.g., pattern row Z2) are displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, by generating a reach display, the pachinko machine 1 can make the player hope that after the variable display has started on the pattern display device 36 and before the specified stop result is displayed, a "jackpot win" has been won in the win/lose lottery and that the player has been allocated a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" in the allocation lottery.

The manner in which the reach display is displayed is not limited to this, and some of the symbol rows may be displayed stationary while the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, with a predetermined character or the like being displayed as a moving image in the background, or each symbol row may be displayed in a reduced size or hidden, with a predetermined character or the like being displayed as a moving image over substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expectation effect as a type of variable display of the symbol display device 36. An expectation effect is an effect that makes the player expect that he or she will have won the jackpot in the win/lose lottery after the variable display has started on the symbol display device 36 and before the specified stop result is displayed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expectation effects: the reach display and the advance notice display mentioned above.

The advance notice is an expected effect that makes it easier to generate an effect when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" or when the winning/losing lottery results in a "special miss" rather than a "jackpot win" than when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss". Instead of making the effect easier to generate, the advance notice may make it easier to select an effect with a low occurrence rate, or may be a combination of these.
It should be noted that while the lottery as to whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 4, the lottery as to whether or not to generate a preview display is executed by the audio and light emission control device 5.

The mode of the advance notice display is such that, among the multiple symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, a portion of the symbol rows (e.g., the symbol row Z1) is displayed stationary on the pay line L and then multiple symbol rows (e.g., the symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G. This advance notice display occurs in both cases where the reach display is generated and where the reach display is not generated, but is set to be more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated.
It should be noted that the preview display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the shape of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and loops within the range of 0 to 198 by returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 198.
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and each time it is updated, it is stored in the lottery counter buffer.
Then, the MPU 42 determines the display duration of the pattern on the main display unit 34 and the display duration of the pattern on the pattern display device 36 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. These display durations will be described in detail later.

<Various processes executed by the main control device>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, and main processing that is started when the power is turned on. The timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described below in order.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 42 also executes NMI interrupt processing which is activated by inputting a power outage signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal); however, a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 executes steps S101 to S105 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals) as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a read process of the multiple detection sensors 301 to 306. In this read process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the multiple detection sensors 301 to 306, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 judges that the detection sensors 301 to 304 corresponding to the various winning ports have detected the winning of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the prize balls, and transmits the set command to the payout control device 46. For example, when the MPU 42 judges that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected the winning of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 46 to pay out 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number.
In addition, the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on a prize ball command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 executes an update of the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value, it clears the random number initial value counter CINI by returning it to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 42 executes updates of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, it resets the value of each of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for through play. In this winning process for through play, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 detects the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 stores the value of the electric role opening counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reservation area 443. In addition, the MPU 42 sets a command for turning on the third reservation lamp unit 373, and transmits this set command to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the third reserved lamp unit 373 based on a command sent from the MPU 42. As described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31 is a maximum of four, and the third reserved lamp unit 373 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for the operation port.
The winning process for the operating port will be explained in detail below.

<Winning process for the operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for an operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25 (initial entry) by determining whether the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper actuation port 25 has detected the entry of a game ball. If the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25, in step S202, the MPU 42 determines the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display unit reserve area Ra, and sets the reserved number as the first start reserve memory number RaN in a specified memory area in the first result display unit reserve area Ra. The MPU 42 then executes the processes from step S205 onwards.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has not entered the upper operating port 25, then in step S203, it determines whether or not a game ball has entered the lower operating port 26 (initial entry) by determining whether or not the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 has detected the entry of a game ball.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a game ball has not entered the lower actuation port 26, it ends the winning process for the actuation port. If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a game ball has entered the lower actuation port 26, it determines in step S204 the number of reserved balls stored in the second result display unit reserve area Rb, and sets the number of reserved balls as the second start reserve memory number RbN in a predetermined memory area in the second result display unit reserve area Rb. After that, the MPU 42 executes the process from step S205 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 determines in step S205 whether the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this reference embodiment).
If the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is not less than the upper limit, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operation port. If the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit, the MPU 42 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N to update it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 42 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as reserved information in the first free memory area in the result display section reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the start reserved memory number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as pending information in the first free memory area of the first result display unit pending area Ra, that is, the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Ra4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206, "4".

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process as pending information in the first free memory area of the second result display unit pending area Rb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S204, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Rb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206, "4".

In step S208, when the MPU 42 sets the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that the hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits the set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the sound and light emission control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of a game ball into the upper operating port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the first reserved lamp section 371 and executes a predetermined process based on the first reserved occurrence command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25 is a maximum of four, and the first reserved lamp section 371 lights up the number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Also, in step S208, when the MPU 42 sets the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that the hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display section, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the sound and light emission control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the winning of a game ball into the lower operation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the second reserved lamp section 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second reserved generation command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26 is a maximum of four, and the second reserved lamp section 372 lights up the number of times corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal process.
The MPU 42 executes a main process, which is started when the power is turned on and will be described later, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for progressing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in Fig. 10. Specifically, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S309 periodically at 4 msec intervals, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when remaining time occurs, and executes steps S312 and onward according to the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, winning processing for the operating port, or external output processing for sending commands set in the previous normal processing to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that a prize ball command is set, it sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Also, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a command for presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for an open/close execution mode, is set, and if it is determined that a command for presentation is set, it sends the command for presentation to the sound and light emission control device 5.

In step S302, the MPU 42 executes an update of the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, it clears the value of the fluctuation type counter CS by returning it to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for progressing a game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also executes determination of information related to the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 36 and determination of information related to the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game number control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demo display execution judgment process. In this demo display execution judgment process, the MPU 42 judges whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of a game round, and if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, it sets a demo command for starting a demo display. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
In addition, the audio and light emission control device 5 starts the demo display execution process based on a demo command sent from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 7,500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if the MPU 42 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process for controlling the drive of the electric role 261 provided in the lower operating port 26. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role opening lottery based on the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 443 of the RAM 44, and executes opening and closing processing of the electric role 261 if the electric role opening lottery is won. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the role display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric role opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 executes launch control to cause the power supply/launch control device 47 to launch the game ball based on the player's rotation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this reference embodiment). The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16. Furthermore, when predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply/launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power outage flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. The power outage flag is cleared the next time the main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears the various flags by assigning 0 to the flags. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to a power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and stores a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether or not the timing has come to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not time to execute the next normal process, that is, when remaining time occurs, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310, and updates the fluctuation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., if there is no remaining time, it executes step S301 again to start the next normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process.
In the main processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 42 waits until a predetermined time (e.g., about 500 msec) has elapsed after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound and light emission control device 5) to become operable.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, it repeats the process of step S402. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, it executes the processes from step S403 onward.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number of times reaches 10,000. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission-prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission-prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S 403 , the MPU 42 permits access to the RAM 44 .
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply and launch control device 47 is turned on.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not on, then in step S405, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 42 calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 42 determines whether the RAM judgment value calculated in step S406 is normal or not, thereby confirming the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM judgment value calculated in step S406 with the RAM judgment value saved in step S313 (processing during power interruption) of the normal processing, and if they match, determines that the RAM judgment value is normal, and if they do not match, determines that the RAM judgment value is abnormal.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 42 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be determined by a method other than the method of checking the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, the validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be checked by writing a keyword to a specified area of RAM 44 in the power outage processing and checking in the main processing whether or not the keyword was written correctly.

As described above, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, if the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, or if the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM judgment value is not normal, it executes the processing from step S409 onwards.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the working area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the amusement facility can initialize the data stored in RAM 44 by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erase switch when the amusement facility opens for business. Also, if the power outage monitoring board 45 does not confirm the occurrence of a power outage or if the RAM judgment value is abnormal, the pachinko machine 1 initializes the data stored in RAM 44.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, in step S411, the MPU 42 sends an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio and light emission control device 5), and in step S412, allows the occurrence of timer interrupt processing and proceeds to the normal processing described above.
In addition, upon receiving the initial command sent in step S411, the sub-control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is occurring normally and performs its own initialization.

<Game Play Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game play control process.
In the game play control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 judges whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the MPU 42 judges in step S501 that the game is in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 ends the game round control process without executing the processes in and after step S502. Therefore, if the MPU 42 judges that the game is in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the entry of a game ball into each of the operating ports 25, 26 is detected.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the opening and closing execution mode flag when switching to the opening and closing execution mode, and clears the opening and closing execution mode flag when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it determines in step S502 whether the main display unit 34 is performing a variable display, i.e., whether a game round is in progress.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is not performing a variable display, it executes processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is performing a variable display, it executes a game round progression process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the game start process of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 42 grasps the reserved number stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section and the reserved number stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and judges whether the total number CRN of these reserved numbers is "0" or less. If the MPU 42 judges in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, it ends the game number control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, it executes a data setting process in step S504 to set the reserved information stored in the first result display reserve area Ra or the second result display reserve area Rb for consumption of a game round. After that, in step S505, the MPU 42 executes a change start process to start a change display on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to consume a game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 judges whether the second start pending memory number RbN of the reserve area Rb for the second result display section, which was set in step S204 of the winning process for the actuation port, is equal to or less than "0." If the MPU 42 judges in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0," it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and if the MPU 42 judges in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit for consumption of a game round, and a data setting process for the second result display unit, which sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of a game round.
Then, when the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start reserved memory number RbN is not "0" or less, it executes the data setting process for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. In other words, when the MPU 42 determines that there is reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of a game ball into the lower actuation port 26, it preferentially sets the reserved information stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of a game round, regardless of whether there is reserved information stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending memory number RaN in the first result display section pending area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the reserved information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion reserved area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the reserved information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reserved area Ra. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the reserved information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 toward the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the reserved information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the reserved information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the reserved information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 44. This second result display unit flag is a flag for identifying which of the main display units 34, the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342, is to start a variable display when a game round is completed. In this step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag, which indicates that when a game round is completed, the first result display unit 341 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25.

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command for recognizing that the pending information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the sound and light emission control device 5. This first shift command includes information for recognizing that the pending information stored in the first result display unit pending area Ra has been shifted based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25.
The sound and light emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first reserved lamp section 371 and executes a predetermined process based on the first shift command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emission control device 5 reduces the number of lit first reserved lamp sections 371 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending memory number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the reserved information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion reserved area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the reserved information stored in the memory area of the second result display reserved area Rb. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the reserved information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the reserved information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the reserved information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the reserved information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag, which indicates that the second result display unit 342 will start to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 when a game round is played.

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command for recognizing that the pending information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the sound and light emission control device 5. This second shift command includes information for recognizing that the pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball into the lower actuation port 26.
The sound and light emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second reserved lamp section 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second shift command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emission control device 5 reduces the number of lit second reserved lamp sections 372 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, then in step S702, it reads out the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see Figure 6(a)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43, and if the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, then in step S703, it reads out the win/loss table for the high probability mode (see Figure 6(b)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose determination process in step S704. In this win/lose determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/lose table read out in step S702 or step S703. As mentioned above, the win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," or a "normal loss result," and this is the same whether the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode or a high probability mode.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether the result determined in step S704 is a "jackpot win". If the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win", it executes the processes in steps S706 and onwards, and if the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win", it executes the processes in steps S712 and onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S706 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 should start displaying a variable value based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25, and therefore in step S707, the first allocation table (see Figure 7 (a)) is read out from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 should start displaying a variable value based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26, and therefore in step S708, the second allocation table (see FIG. 7(b)) is read out from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes an allocation determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the allocation lottery (allocation result) by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34 according to the allocation result determined in step S709, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by comparing the allocation result determined in step S709 with a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 43. This stop result table for the jackpot result specifies the form of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 differently for each allocation result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "unexplicit low round high probability result", it sets a non-explicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result", it sets a explicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is a "most favorable result", it sets a most favorable result flag. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 executes the determination of the allocation result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (the process after step S712) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result determined in step S704 is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is a "special failure result," it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is not a "special failure result," it executes the processing from step S715 onwards.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a special losing result. In this stop result setting process for a special losing result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for a special losing result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The form of the pattern set in this stop result table for a special losing result is different from the form of the pattern set in the stop result table for a big win result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special miss flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 refers to this special miss flag to determine whether the winning/losing result is a "special miss result."

In response to this, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a normal failure result. In this stop result setting process for a normal failure result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for a normal failure result that is pre-stored in the ROM 43. The form of the pattern set in this stop result table for a normal failure result is different from the form of the pattern set in the stop result table for a jackpot result and the stop result table for a special failure result.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 42 executes a process of setting a display duration (display duration period) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44.

In addition, in the process of setting the display duration, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur if the allocation result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," and if the win/loss result determined in step S704 is a "normal loss result" and the reach occurrence lottery is won. As described above, the MPU 42 executes the reach occurrence lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

When the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines a display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines a display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to a display duration table for non-reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in a display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display duration when the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 is consumed is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number of reserved items related to the upper actuation port 25 increases. And, the display duration when the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 is consumed is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number of reserved items related to the lower actuation port 26 increases. Also, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode compared to when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of reserved items is the same, the display duration when the support mode is the high frequency support mode is shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

The non-reach display duration table may be set to the opposite relationship to that described above, such as the display duration becoming longer as the number of reserved items increases, or may be configured not to change depending on the number of reserved items or support mode. Also, separate display duration tables may be set for the win/lose result and the allocation result.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information related to the display duration time, and does not include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.
As described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are different from each other.
Therefore, even if information on whether or not a reach display will occur is not included in the variation command, it is possible for the audio and light emission control device 5, which is the sub-control device, to determine whether or not a reach display will occur based on information related to the display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/loss result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the win/loss result, such as "jackpot win,""special loss result," and "normal loss result." The type command also includes information related to the allocation result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the allocation result, such as "low probability result,""non-explicit low round high probability result,""explicit low round high probability result," and "most favorable result."
In the following description, the win/loss result and the allocation result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, and based on the determination result, starts a variable display on the main display unit 34. After that, the MPU 42 ends the variable start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 should start displaying changes based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 when a game round is completed, and so the MPU 42 causes the first result display unit 341 to start displaying changes.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 should start displaying changes based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 when a game round is completed, and so the MPU 42 causes the second result display unit 342 to start displaying changes.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process, the game round progression process in steps S506 to S509 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, and if it determines that the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, executes processing for progressing the game round in steps S506 to S509.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether the display duration time set in step S716 of the variation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the display duration time counter in the RAM 44 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed, it executes a process for variable display in step S507. In this process for variable display, the MPU 42 updates the display of the main display unit 34 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game play control process.

In response to this, if the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has elapsed, it executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 42 identifies information (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34) stored in the RAM 44 in any of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the variation start process executed when starting the variable display on the main display unit 34. Then, when the game round ends, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display unit 34 so that the pattern corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the main display unit 34 during the variable display.

Here, the picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the gaming facility or the like can check the game result by visually checking the main display unit 34 at the end of a game round. This allows the manager of the gaming facility or the like to easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is being carried out, for example, to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if it had won a lottery for a jackpot.
Furthermore, the main display unit 34 has a smaller display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and the pictures displayed in a stopped state on the main display unit 34 are harder for the player to recognize than the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 displayed in a stopped state on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Therefore, when a round of play ends, the player will determine whether or not he or she has won a jackpot by checking the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 rather than the main display unit 34, which can increase the attention paid to the display screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets a fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound and light emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game number control process.
The sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process for ending the presentation of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound and light emission control device 5 may be configured to end the presentation of the game round independently without needing to receive the variation end command.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it executes the processes in and after step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes in and after step S811.

First, the process (the process after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 judges whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended. If the MPU 42 judges in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if the MPU 42 determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805, it sets "2" to an opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 42 to specify the total number of times that the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result," i.e., that the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a few rounds with high probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2". If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a few rounds with high probability result, that is, if it determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result", then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15". This round counter RC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to identify the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with different ending conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a round number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" and an opening/closing number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

The round number-defined mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to a value set in a round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends on the condition that the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end on the condition that the number of rounds has been played.

The pachinko machine 1 executes one opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 for one round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening and closing door 272 to an open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening and closing door 272 to a closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls in the big winning hole 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S805, S807, and S808, in step S809, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time a timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and can be any value.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the winning/losing result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the waiting time for the opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes it as the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different between the game result of a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" and the game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process after step S811) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening opening and closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of opening and closing the big prize opening.
In the special prize opening opening and closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether the special prize opening 271 is open or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the special prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processes in and after step S902.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the special prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes in and after step S906.

First, the process (the process after step S902) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the special prize opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", it ends the big prize opening opening/closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not less than "0", then in step S903 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the large prize opening opening process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes a large prize opening process in step S904.
The large prize opening process in step S904 will now be described in detail.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening process.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S1002 it sets the winning counter PC in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "8," and in step S1003 it sets the timer counter T to "85." As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC to "8" in step S1004, and determines in step S1005 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not a low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution process of the large prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 sets the opening door 272 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize driving unit 273. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the large prize opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 specifies the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can win the large winning opening 271. In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to the same value ("8" in this reference embodiment) when it determines in step S1001 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" and when it determines that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result", but different values may also be set in the winning counter PC.

The value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 specifies the upper limit duration from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two types of upper limit duration with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 42 sets a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8" to set the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large winning hole 271 to 8.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch period, it is easy to get the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the large prize opening 271.
In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls), so it is difficult to make a game ball enter the large prize opening 271. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball enter the large prize opening 271.

Returning to the explanation of the special prize opening/closing process, the process from step S905 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the large prize opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S905 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Then, the MPU 42 ends the large prize opening opening and closing process.
In addition, based on the open command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process after step S906) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the special prize opening 271 is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 judges whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0". That is, the MPU 42 judges whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the big prize opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S907.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S918.

First, the process (steps S907 and after) performed when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 271. The determination of whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 271 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the large prize opening 271.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no win has occurred in the special prize opening 271, it ends the special prize opening opening opening process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a win has occurred in the special win port 271, then in step S908, it updates the value of the win counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the prize counter PC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the large prize opening opening process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to set the opening and closing door 272 to a closed state.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the close command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result," it executes the processing in step S913 and thereafter.
In step S913, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", then in step S915, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500". After that, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing process.

The value set in the timer counter T in step S915 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state and then when it is set to the open state again. In this embodiment, the open waiting time is 1 sec. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode or the progress of the mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and can be any value.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening, i.e., the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes them as the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different between the game result of a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" and the game result other than these.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound and light emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing process.
In addition, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process (step S918 and subsequent steps) to be performed when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the result is not a "special miss result," i.e., that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processes from step S921 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S921 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S923 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening/closing counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process, the process from step S812 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large prize opening/closing process of step S811, the MPU 42 determines in step S812 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 clears the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S814, and then executes a transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode is ended.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result."

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result", it executes the processing from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result", it executes the processing from step S1105 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S1102 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S 1103 , the MPU 42 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 44 .
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is obtained in the win/lose lottery.

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/lose lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win." The MPU 42 then ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed, the MPU 42 clears the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit few rounds high probability result flag, explicit few rounds high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) set in the RAM 44 according to the allocation result, and the special miss flag. Also, in step S701 of the aforementioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44.

Next, the process (the process from step S1105 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most favorable result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S1106 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes the processes from step S1103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, then in step S1107 it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. This causes the MPU 42 to set the win/lose lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win." After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

Next, the process (the process from step S1108 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit few-round high-probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is a "low probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" (if the win/loss result is determined to be a "special loss result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is a "low probability result", it executes the processes in steps S1109 and onward.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high probability mode flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the win/lose lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result becomes anything other than a "low probability result."

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "100".
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 44. If the number limit flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, are played. When 100 games are played, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result" or a "high probability result with an explicit few rounds," the game state will transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round number setting mode) regardless of the current game state. The high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the game state will transition to the high probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round number setting mode) ends. The high probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In contrast, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified few rounds high probability result," the game state will transition to the high probability mode and low-frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round number setting mode) ends. The high probability mode and low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the game state will transition to low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode (i.e., round number setting mode) ends regardless of the current game state. The low probability mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode if 100 game rounds have been played without the winning/losing lottery resulting in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the result of the lottery is not a "jackpot win," i.e., if the result of the lottery is a "special miss" or a "normal miss," the game state will not change.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
19, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control device 4 .
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

Figure 20 shows the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area.
As shown in Figure 20, the sub-side reservation information storage area 543 has a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side hold area SRa provided as the first sub-side acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4. Each area SRa1 to SRa4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the first hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRa1 → second area SRa2 → third area SRa3 → fourth area SRa4.

As described above, the first sub-side reserve area SRa has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the first reserve occurrence command can be reserved. The first sub-side reserve area SRa also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side hold area SRb, provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas, a first area SRb1 to a fourth area SRb4. Each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the second hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRb1 → second area SRb2 → third area SRb3 → fourth area SRb4.

As described above, the second sub-side reserve area SRb has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the second reserve occurrence command can be reserved. The second sub-side reserve area SRb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is an area for moving the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa or the second sub-side reserved area SRb when starting the changing display of the pattern display device 36.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is an element formed by compounding the program ROM 63, the work RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like on a chip. The MPU 62, the VDP 65, the character ROM 66, and the video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command sent from the audio/light emission control device 5 and performs a predetermined calculation process based on the command to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating a command for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the design display device 36. The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67 .

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 by using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has a plurality of frame areas 691 and 692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691, 692 is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area 691, 692 includes a number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, each unit area employs a full-color system, allowing the setting of 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, and has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes overall.

When drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is used to draw on the pattern display device 36, the VDP 65 creates drawing data to be used next for the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 then generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the audio/light emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2001 to S2006 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 stores the command in the RAM 54. Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands sent from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they were sent from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they were stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes a reserved symbol determination process based on a command sent from the MPU 42. In the reserved symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines the generation of a reserved symbol, the shift of a reserved symbol, etc. This reserved symbol determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes a presentation determination process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the presentation determination process, the MPU 52 determines presentations for game rounds, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. This presentation determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes a demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed after a game round has ended without a new game round being started. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2006, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the commands set in the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003 to the display control device 6. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6, and if it determines that it is time to transmit the various commands to the display control device 6, it transmits the commands to the display control device 6. The MPU 52 then ends the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the hold determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the reservation determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a reserved decision process to generate a reserved pattern, shift the reserved pattern, etc. In this reserved decision process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a hold occurrence command (first hold occurrence command or second hold occurrence command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has not received a hold generation command, it executes the processes in and after step S2103.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has received a hold generation command, it executes a hold generation process in step S2102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. This hold generation process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2102, or if it is determined in step S2101 that the hold occurrence command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2103 and onward.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that the hold shift command has not been received, it ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that it has received the hold shift command, it executes hold shift processing in step S2104. In this hold shift processing, the MPU 52 executes a shift of the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This hold shift processing will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the hold occurrence processing.

<Pending occurrence processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the reservation generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 24. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold occurrence command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold occurrence command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the process in step S2204 and thereafter.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203, it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, and sets that number of holds as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, in step S2204, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In the lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue an advance notice reservation.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, a notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc., to inform the player of the expected degree of the hold, or a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect to inform the player of the expected degree of the hold by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, it returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation generating lottery in step S2205 was won (whether or not to generate an advance notice reservation).
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold is to be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. In addition, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process in step S2004 described above based on the contents of this notice hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area of the first sub side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area of the second sub side reserve area SRb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN of "4" updated in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, then in step S2208, it executes a normal hold generation process. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. Based on the contents of this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 also executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal pending information in the first free memory area of the first sub side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the normal pending information in the first free memory area of the second sub side reserve area SRb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the normal pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN of "4" updated in step S2204.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207 or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display occurrence command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays a notice hold pattern or a normal hold pattern on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the reservation shift process.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes the hold shift process in step S2104 of the hold determination process. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in Fig. 25. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the contents of the hold shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that a first shift command has been received, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304, and if it determines in step S2301 that a first shift command has not been received (if it determines that a second shift command has been received), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory count SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, shifts the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and shifts the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process is a process to sequentially shift the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, shifts the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and shifts the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

After executing the processing of step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display shift command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the normal hold and notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec period) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the normal hold and notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the preview reserved image and the normal reserved image displayed on the display screen of the image display device.
As shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side reserve area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB provided between the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first reservation lamp unit 371 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa. On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa.
The second reservation lamp unit 372 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb. Similarly, the bases B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb.

The pedestals B11 to B14, B21 to B24, and execution pedestal AB notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold by placing a notice hold pattern or a normal hold pattern thereon.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the pedestals B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that advance notice hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance notice hold image, on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a blinking white sphere image, which is an advance pending image, on the execution base AB.

26, the MPU 62 places the regular reserved pattern on the bases B11 and B12, the advance reservation pattern on the base B13, and the regular reserved pattern on the execution base AB. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places the regular reserved pattern on the base B21. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any pattern on the bases B14, B22 to B24.
In this embodiment, the pictures of the normal hold and the notice hold are different from each other, but they may be the same. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each base on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes in and after step S2409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has received each command, then in step S2402 it determines whether the game result is a "most advantageous result" or a "low probability result" based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most favorable result" or the "low probability result", it executes a pattern determination process corresponding to the type of game result in step S2403. In this pattern determination process, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most favorable result", it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the pay line L, and if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the pay line L. The odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", then in step S2404, it determines whether the game result is a "normal loss result" or not based on the content of the type command.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not a "normal losing result", that is, when the game result is any of a "special losing result", a "non-indicated few rounds high probability result", and a "indicated few rounds high probability result", it executes a common symbol determination process in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal losing result" in the winning/losing lottery, rather than a combination of symbols having the same numbers. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information related to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a final stop result to be displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by drawing lots or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in the reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining a presentation pattern in step S2407. In this process of determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table previously stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. Note that in step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selected performance pattern.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable display start command and the stop result command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 starts the variable display and then finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L.

After executing the process of step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S2409 onwards.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2413.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, then in step S2410, it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining an effect for the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the process of determining an effect for the open/close execution mode, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-expressed few rounds high probability result", it selects effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. If the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "expressed few rounds high probability result", it selects effect B as the effect for the open/close execution mode. If the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "most favorable result", it selects effect C or effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode. If the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", it selects effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode.
The duration of effects A and B corresponds to the time required for the large prize opening 271 to be opened and closed twice in a short time in the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects C and D corresponds to the time required for the large prize opening 271 to be opened and closed 15 times in a long time in the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, based on the selection result of effects A to D, the MPU 52 performs the illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and performs audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets a command for the opening and closing execution mode including information related to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode selected in step S2411. The MPU 52 then stores the command for the opening and closing execution mode in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This command for the opening and closing execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the performance for the open/close execution mode on the pattern display device 36 based on the command for the open/close execution mode sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the performance for the open/close execution mode selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2412, or if it is determined in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2413 and onward.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processes. In the other processes, the MPU 52 executes processes for progressing the performance for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, close command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the performance determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status, etc.>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. Specifically, Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results excluding "normal miss results" and game states, etc., in which game results are arranged in columns and game states, etc. are arranged in rows.
As shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1 has, as game results excluding a "normal miss result", results of whether or not a "jackpot win" and a "special miss result" have been obtained, and allocation results of an "unspecified low-round high-probability result", an "explicit low-round high-probability result", a "most advantageous result", and a "low-probability result".

Here, the "special losing result" is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" (symbol × in the figure), as shown in the second column of the table in Figure 28. Also, the allocation result is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" (symbol ○ in the figure).
The following describes the relationship between game results, excluding "normal miss results," and game states, etc. In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between game results and game states, etc. as follows, but the combination of game results and game states, the content of the game results, and the content of the game states, etc. are arbitrary.

In the "special losing result", the opening/closing execution mode is changed to the opening/closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the "special losing result", the winning/losing lottery mode is not changed.
In the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode is switched to a round number regulation mode in which rounds are played with an upper limit of two times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the winning/losing lottery mode is switched to a high probability mode.
In this way, although the "special losing result" and the "non-disclosed short-round high probability result" have different types of opening and closing execution modes, they have in common that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time.

In addition, in the case of a "special miss result" and an "undisclosed few rounds high probability result", the stopping result will be a special combination of symbols, and the presentation for the open/close execution mode will be presentation A. Furthermore, in the case of a "special miss result" and an "undisclosed few rounds high probability result", the support mode will not be switched. In addition, in the game round after the end of the open/close execution mode, the symbol display device 36 will not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is a high probability mode.

Therefore, by checking the stop result or the performance for the open/close execution mode, the player cannot know whether the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result". In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in an "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result" and the game moves to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 performs a disguise as if the game did not move to the win/lose lottery mode in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends.
Therefore, the player can enjoy predicting whether the win/lose lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode while playing the game.

In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which round play is performed with a maximum number of times set to two, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is performed twice in a short period of time. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the win/lose lottery mode transitions to a high probability mode. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the stopping result is a special combination of symbols, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode is presentation B. In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G indicating that the mode is the high probability mode.
Therefore, by checking the stop result and the presentation for the opening and closing execution mode, the player can understand that the game result is an "explicit few-round high-probability result."

In the case of the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
Here, in the "most favorable result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers, the winning/losing selection mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode becomes presentation C or presentation D. Specifically, if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers, the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode becomes presentation C, and if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode becomes presentation D.
In addition, in the case of a "low probability result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the winning/losing selection mode is shifted to a low probability mode, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode is presentation D. Furthermore, in the case of a "most favorable result" and a "low probability result", the support mode is shifted to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the stopping result is a combination of symbols with the same odd numbers and the presentation for the open/close execution mode is presentation C, the player can know that the game result is the "most advantageous result." However, if the stopping result is a combination of symbols with the same even numbers, the player cannot know whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" by checking the stopping result or the presentation for the open/close execution mode.

Then, in the game round after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the final effect for the opening and closing execution mode is effect D, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is the high probability mode.

Specifically, the pattern display device 36 does not display an image on the display screen G that clearly indicates that it is the high probability mode, but displays an image on the display screen G that notifies the user that the high frequency support mode will transition to the low frequency support mode when the number of play times reaches a reference number for ending (specifically, 100 times). In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result," in the play times after the end of the open/close execution mode, if the final effect for the open/close execution mode is effect D, the pattern display device 36 will disguise the game result as if it was a "low probability result."

If the allocation result is the "most favorable result," the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G indicating that the game result is a "high probability mode" after 100 play times have been played without resulting in a "jackpot win" in the win/lose lottery. In other words, the symbol display device 36 cancels the disguise that was applied so that the game result was a "low probability result."

[Modification of the Reference Embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, but includes modifications and improvements within the scope of the invention.
(1) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once per round of play. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the big prize opening 271 multiple times per round of play.
(2) In this reference embodiment, after the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed or when the total number of winning game balls in the big prize opening 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit number. In contrast, for example, the upper limit number may be made to vary according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state again when the total number of winning game balls entering the large winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit of eight balls. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to any number other than eight. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to be different depending on the allocation result. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to be different for each round during one opening/closing execution mode.

(4) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state again when the total number of winning game balls in the big winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to have an end trigger opening that sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state when a game ball enters the opening, and to allow a ball to enter the end trigger opening when a predetermined time has passed.
(5) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration period) has elapsed. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of a win in the special winning opening 271, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state.

(6) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to move to the next round of play without setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state.
(7) In the present embodiment, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set to be shorter than the ball launch cycle. In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode may be set to be longer than the ball launch cycle and shorter than n times the ball launch cycle (n=1, 2, or 3).

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 had two types of opening and closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 had an opening and closing execution mode in which a round game is executed two times with a short-time upper limit duration, and an opening and closing execution mode in which a round game is executed fifteen times with a long-time upper limit duration. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may have an opening and closing execution mode that differs from these in terms of the upper limit duration mode and the number of times round games are executed. In addition, instead of a configuration in which multiple types of opening and closing execution modes are set by varying the upper limit duration mode, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to set multiple types of opening and closing execution modes by varying the degree of opening of the opening and closing door 272, such as half open or fully open. Furthermore, the upper limit duration mode may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different, even though it appears to be the same mode from the player.

(9) In this reference embodiment, the game results and the effects for the opening and closing execution mode were preset to correspond one-to-one. In contrast, for example, the effects for the opening and closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from multiple types of effects without corresponding to the game results, or may be set by selecting from multiple types of effects by lottery or the like, with the selection rate being varied depending on the game results.

(10) In this reference form, when the game result is any one of a "special losing result," "non-disclosed few-round high-probability result," and "disclosed few-round high-probability result," the MPU 52 determines information related to a special combination of symbols as the final stop result to be displayed on the pay line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result. In contrast, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result, making it difficult for the player to know which game result it is.

(11) In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to select the jackpot occurrence, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 to select the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. In contrast, the MPU 42 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 to select the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 does not need to be provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

(12) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of losing results, a "special losing result" and a "normal losing result", and the MPU 42 executes the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot by comparing a winning/losing table that stores the value of the random number that will win the jackpot with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. In other words, the MPU 42 executes the lottery for the "special losing result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In contrast, the MPU 42 may execute the lottery for the "special losing result" by using a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result".

(13) In this reference form, in a game state in which the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, the random number value that results in a "special miss result" is two, and in a game state in which the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, the random number value that results in a "special miss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special miss result" is set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. In contrast, the probability of a "special miss result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, or may be set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability of a "special miss result" may be set to be zero in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 creates advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by setting the win/lose lottery mode and the support mode. However, advantageous and unfavorable game states may be created by setting game states other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game times for which the high-frequency support mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by whether or not to transition to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game times for which the high-probability mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(15) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 in the first result display unit reserved area Ra and stores the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 in the second result display unit reserved area Rb, thereby separately storing the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may store the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 together.
(16) In this embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for use in playing an episode, regardless of whether there is reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25. In contrast, the MPU 42 may set reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for use in playing an episode in the order in which the reserved information is won.

(17) In this embodiment, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the audio and light emission control device 5, which then transmits the result of analyzing the command to the display control device 6, thereby controlling the display control device 6. Alternatively, the main control device 4 may transmit a command to the display control device 6, which then transmits the result of analyzing the command to the audio and light emission control device 5, thereby controlling the audio and light emission control device 5. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio and light emission control device 5 and the commands transmitted from the audio and light emission control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this embodiment and may be any commands.
(18) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control device 4, the sound and light emission control device 5, and the display control device 6 as separate control devices. However, for example, the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as a single control device, or at least one of the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as a single control device together with the main control device 4.

(19) In this embodiment, the symbol display device 36 executes a performance for a game round on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable display of the symbols. In contrast, the performance for a game round is not limited to the performance described in this embodiment, and is optional. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a performance for a game round by combining and operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 2 with the symbol display device 36. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a performance for a game round by combining and operating a light-emitting means provided on the game board 2 with the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a performance for a game round by combining and operating these decorative members and light-emitting means with the symbol display device 36.

(20) In this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win/lose lottery and allocation lottery) based on winning at the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, and then the main display unit 34 and the pattern display unit 36 execute a variable display and display the result of the internal lottery executed based on winning at the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26 as a result of stopping the variable display. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 and the pattern display unit 36 may start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and display the result of the internal lottery executed after starting the variable display as a result of stopping the variable display. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is executed and the setting of the stop result, etc. is executed.

(21) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main display unit 34, which executes the varying display of the images and displays the result of the internal lottery as the stopping result of the varying display. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 may display the same stopping result as the stopping result of the varying display regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or may display the stopping results randomly so that the result of the internal lottery cannot be identified. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be equipped with a main display unit 34.

(22) In this reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 executes a presentation for a game round on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable display of the symbols. In contrast, the symbol display device 36 may execute a presentation for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (picture) that clearly indicates the result of an internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 36 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area displaying the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 and an area on the periphery of the area displaying the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and when the varying display of the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a pattern indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The pattern displayed in this predetermined area may be in the variable display state or may be hidden during the varying display of the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

The symbols displayed in the specified area may be characters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for players to distinguish, or a combination of these may be used. Also, even if the characters, colors, or patterns are not difficult for players to distinguish, similar symbols or combinations of these may be used to make them difficult for players to distinguish. In this way, the manager of the gaming facility, for example, can easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring by visually checking the symbol display device 36 without visually checking the main display unit 34 at the end of a round of play, in order to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if it had won the lottery for a jackpot.

(23) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, the gaming machine may be configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and the information of this optical code can be captured and read by a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like, and the gaming machine can be configured so that information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to a web server by accessing a website. The gaming machine may also be configured so that information from the web server can be received by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine to input a password issued by accessing a website into the gaming machine.

(24) In this embodiment, the gaming machine of the present invention has been described by taking the pachinko machine 1 as an example. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 1. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric device a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area, or a pachinko machine that generates the right to a jackpot when a gaming ball enters a specific area. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of gaming machine, such as an arrange ball machine or a mahjong ball machine.

[Reference Form A]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment A of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to embodiment A of the present invention.
29, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is an element formed by compounding the program ROM 63, the work RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like on a chip. The MPU 62, the VDP 65, the character ROM 66, and the video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command sent from the audio/light emission control device 5 and performs a predetermined calculation process based on the command to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating a command for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the design display device 36. The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67 .

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 by using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has a plurality of frame areas 691A, 692A. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691A and a second frame area 692A.

The first frame area 691A comprises a first layer 691A1, a second layer 691A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 691A1, and a third layer 691A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 691A2, and stores one frame's worth of drawing data by overlapping each layer 691A1 to 691A3 in order of priority.
The second frame area 692 comprises a first layer 692A1, a second layer 692A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 692A1, and a third layer 692A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 692A2, and stores one frame's worth of drawing data by overlapping each layer 692A1 to 692A3 in order of priority.
In the following description, the first layers 691A1 and 692A1 are also simply referred to as the first layer L1, the second layers 691A2 and 692A2 are also simply referred to as the second layer L2, and the third layers 691A3 and 692A3 are also simply referred to as the third layer L3.

Therefore, each layer L1 to L3 is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each layer L1 to L3 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a memory capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area employs a full-color system, allowing the setting of 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, and has a total memory capacity of at least 3 bytes.

When drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is used to draw on the pattern display device 36, the VDP 65 creates drawing data to be used next for the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 then generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processes different from those in the previous reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the hold generation process and the process of determining the presentation pattern differ from those in the previous reference embodiment. The contents of the hold generation process and the process of determining the presentation pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

<Pending occurrence processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the reservation generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 in substantially the same manner as in the above-mentioned reference embodiment. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 30, after executing the process of step S2204, it executes the processes of steps S2210A to S2212A.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold occurrence command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold occurrence command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the process in step S2204 and thereafter.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203, it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, and sets that number of holds as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, in step S2204, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1.

In step S2210A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the contents of the hold occurrence command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode (if the MPU 52 determines that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode), it executes the processes from step S2205 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it executes the processes in steps S2211A and after.

First, the process (the process after step S2205) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In the lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue an advance notice reservation.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, a notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc., to inform the player of the expected degree of the hold, or a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect to inform the player of the expected degree of the hold by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that in this reference form, a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect will be explained, and an explanation of notice holds that execute other notice displays will be omitted.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, it returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation generating lottery in step S2205 was won (whether or not to generate an advance notice reservation).
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold is to be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. In addition, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process in step S2004 described above based on the contents of this notice hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area of the first sub side reserve area SRa, that is, the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area of the second sub side reserve area SRb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN of "4" updated in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2207 that a notice hold will not be generated, then in step S2209, it executes a normal hold generation process. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. Based on the contents of this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 also executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal pending information in the first free memory area of the first sub side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub side start pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the normal pending information in the first free memory area of the second sub side reserve area SRb, that is, the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 stores the normal pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN of "4" updated in step S2204.

Next, the process (step S2211A and subsequent steps) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2211A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received a second hold generation command sent from the MPU 42 (whether or not the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN was set in step S2203).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second hold occurrence command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2205 onwards described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second hold generation command has been received, it executes a special hold generation process in step S2212A. In this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a special hold. In addition, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and the sound control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004 based on the contents of this special hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

Here, since the MPU 52 has set the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the special pending information in the first free memory area of the second sub side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, if the MPU 52 has set the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the special pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub side start pending memory number SRbN of "4" updated in step S2204.

In this way, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information as sub-side hold information in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the second hold generation command. Each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 is set to a memory capacity capable of storing special hold information for generating a special hold.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207, the normal hold generation process of step S2208, or the special hold generation process of step S2212A, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the occurrence of a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display occurrence command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays a notice hold pattern, a normal hold pattern, or a special hold pattern on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the normal hold, notice hold, and special hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the normal hold, notice hold, and special hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the pre-announced reserved pattern, the normal reserved pattern, and the special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side reserve area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB provided between the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first reservation lamp unit 371 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa. On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa.
The second reservation lamp unit 372 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb. Similarly, the bases B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb.

The bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold by placing a notice hold pattern, a normal hold pattern, or a special hold pattern thereon.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the pedestals B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that advance notice hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance notice hold image, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command sent from the MPU 52, that special hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a black sphere image, which is a special hold image, on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a blinking white sphere image, which is an advance pending image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that special hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a black sphere image, which is a special hold image, on the execution base AB.

Here, in the example of Fig. 31, the MPU 62 places the normal reserved pattern on the bases B11 and B12, places the advance reservation pattern on the base B13, and places the normal reserved pattern on the execution base AB. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places the special reserved pattern on the base B21. In other words, in this example, the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any pattern on the bases B14, B22 to B24.
In this embodiment, the pictures of the normal hold, the notice hold, and the special hold are different from each other, but any two of the pictures may be the same, or all of the pictures may be the same. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB on the display screen G, but each base does not have to be displayed on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in a manner similar to that of the above-mentioned reference embodiment. Note that, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 32, after executing the process of any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406, it executes the process of step S2407A.

In step S2407A, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern that corresponds to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table previously stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration period) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407A, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process of determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a content of the performance as a performance pattern. In this process of determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE by the hold shift process is special hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation decision process in step S3002. In this special hold presentation decision process, the MPU 52 decides on a presentation for consuming the special hold. Based on the contents of this special hold presentation decision process, the MPU 52 also executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the presentation execution process in the aforementioned step S2004.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the special hold on the display screen G.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side reserved information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special reserved information, it sets a special reserved performance end command in step S3004. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special reserved performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side reserved information stored in the sub-side reserved information storage area 543 is included in the special reserved performance end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special reserved performance end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) that was created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.
In this embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side reserved information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special reserved information, the MPU 52 always sets a special reserved performance end command in step S3004, and the MPU 62 clears the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special reserved performance end command sent from the MPU 52. In contrast, the MPU 52 may set the special reserved performance end command only when drawing data has been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side reserved information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side reserved area by the reservation shift processing is advance notice reserved information.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice pending information, it executes advance notice pending performance determination processing in step S3006. In this advance notice pending performance determination processing, the MPU 52 determines a performance (pre-reading performance) for consuming the advance notice pending. In addition, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing in the above-mentioned step S2004 based on the contents of this advance notice pending performance determination processing.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice-on-hold performance command. The MPU 52 then stores the notice-on-hold performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the notice-on-hold performance command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice-on-hold performance command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the performance for consuming the notice reservation on the pattern display device 36 based on the notice reservation performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the performance for consuming the notice reservation on the display screen G.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the flow of the pre-reading performance.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 34, the MPU 62 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "mystery" so that it flies around the entire display screen G, thereby executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announced reserved number, which notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserved number by utilizing the effect of the number of game rounds based on the reserved number that will be consumed before the reserved number. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The look-ahead performance starts by flying the angel character from the top right position of the display screen G toward the center position (see FIG. 34(A)), and then flies the angel character from that position toward the top left position (see FIG. 34(B)). The look-ahead performance then flies the angel character from the top left position (position in FIG. 34(B)) of the display screen G toward the top right position (see FIG. 34(C)), returning the angel character to the start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 34(A)-(C), the look-ahead performance starts flying the angel character again, so that the angel character flies in an infinite loop. Here, in this reference form, the time required for one loop of the look-ahead performance is 10 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the process from step S3008 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes a process of accumulating the display duration. In this process of accumulating the display duration, the MPU 52 calculates the accumulated time of the display duration based on the content of the variable command each time the MPU 52 executes the process of determining the advance notice hold effect in step S3006, and stores the accumulated time in the RAM 54. In other words, the accumulated time of the display duration indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the pre-reading effect. Here, the advance notice hold effect command described above includes information related to the accumulated time of the display duration. Therefore, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point when flying the angel character and the movement thereafter by receiving information related to the accumulated time of the display duration from the MPU 52. Note that the initial value of the accumulated time of the display duration is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not advance notice pending information, it sets an advance notice pending performance end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice pending performance end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This advance notice pending performance end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the performance for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold performance end command sent from the MPU 52.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a cumulative reset process for the display duration. In this cumulative reset process for the display duration, the MPU 52 resets the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0".

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3008, or after executing the process of step S3010, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. Then, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the presentation pattern. In the other processes, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. Note that in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the pre-reading presentation.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading performances and the subsequent flow>
Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance notice reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, Fig. 35(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Fig. 35(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Fig. 35(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Fig. 35(D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.
In this example, the MPU 52 determines that normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and determines that normal pending information is stored in the execution area SAE.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on a change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on a change start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 35 (B).

Furthermore, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold is to be generated, in step S2207, it executes a notice hold generation process and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area of the sub-side reserve area, i.e., in the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 35, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance notice hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance notice hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the advance reservation information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa based on the contents of the reservation display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a blinking white sphere pattern, which is the advance reservation pattern, on the base B13. Here, the VDP 65 displays the advance reservation pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(B).

In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for the consumption of the special hold, so the VDP 65 is not creating drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(C). In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for the consumption of the advance hold, so the VDP 65 is not creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(D).

Figure 36 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first hold shift process is executed after it is determined that advance hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 36 (A) shows the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Figure 36 (B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 36 (C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 36 (D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 36(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern, placed on the base B11 onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern, placed on the base B12 onto the base B11, and shifts the blinking white sphere pattern, which is the advance reservation pattern, placed on the base B13 onto the base B12, based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved pattern and the advance reservation pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 36(B).

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 36 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is notice hold information, in step S3006, executes a notice hold presentation determination process, and in step S3007, sets a notice hold presentation command.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G on the pattern display device 36 as shown in Fig. 36 (A). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve pattern placed on the base B12 in the example of Fig. 36) by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB and the base B11 in the example of Fig. 36). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 36 (D).

In the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 receives the first notice-on-hold performance command after determining that notice-on-hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice-on-hold performance command is "0." Therefore, the MPU 62 will fly the angel character from the top right position of the display screen G as the flight start position, as shown in FIG. 36 (A) and (D).

In the example of Figure 36, since the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for consuming the special hold, the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 36 (C).

<About the flow when consuming normal reserve after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second reservation shift process is executed after it is determined that the advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, Fig. 37(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Fig. 37(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Fig. 37(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Fig. 37(D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 37(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52, and shifts the blinking white sphere pattern, which is the advance reserved pattern placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved pattern and the advance reserved pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 37(B).

As shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 37 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is notice hold information, in step S3006, executes a notice hold presentation determination process, and in step S3007, sets a notice hold presentation command.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, as shown in Fig. 37(A). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve pattern placed on the base B11 in the example of Fig. 37) by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB in the example of Fig. 37). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 37(D).

In the example of Figure 37, the MPU 62 receives a second notice-on-hold performance command after determining that notice-on-hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice-on-hold performance command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in Figures 37(A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the notice pending) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the notice pending presentation end command sent from the MPU 52. In other words, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 will receive the notice pending presentation end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, and so will clear the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the notice pending) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on this notice pending presentation end command.

In the example of Figure 37, since the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for consuming the special hold, the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 37 (C).

<About the flow when consuming special reserve after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that the advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area, the first reservation shift process is executed, and then it is specified that the special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. In other words, FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that the special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area after the state shown in FIG. 36 is reached. Specifically, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 38(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 38(D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 38(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern, placed on the base B11 onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern, placed on the base B12 onto the base B11, and shifts the blinking white sphere pattern, which is the advance reserved pattern, placed on the base B13 onto the base B12, based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved pattern and the advance reserved pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 38(B).

As shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 38 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is notice hold information, in step S3006, executes a notice hold presentation determination process, and in step S3007, sets a notice hold presentation command.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, as shown in Fig. 38 (A). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming the advance notice reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the advance notice reserve pattern placed on the base B12 in the example of Fig. 38) by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB and the base B11 in the example of Fig. 38). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 38 (D).

In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 receives the first notice-on-hold performance command after determining that notice-on-hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the cumulative display duration time included in this notice-on-hold performance command is "0." Therefore, the MPU 62 will fly the angel character from the top right position of the display screen G as the flight start position, as shown in FIG. 38 (A) and (D).

Also, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has received the second hold generation command, it executes the special hold generation process in step S2212A and stores the special hold information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays a special hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of a special hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that special reserved information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb based on the contents of the reserved display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a black sphere pattern, which is a special reserved pattern, on the base B21. Here, the VDP 65 displays the special reserved pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38 (B).

In the example of Figure 38, since the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for consuming the special hold, the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 38 (C).

Figure 39 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 39(A) shows the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Figure 39(B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 39(C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 39(D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 39(A), the MPU 62 shifts the black sphere image, which is the special reserved image, placed on the pedestal B21, onto the execution pedestal AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 39(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image, the advance reservation image, and the special reserved image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the special reserved information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the reserved shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 39 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it determines in step S3001 that it is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation determination process in step S3002, and sets a special hold presentation command in step S3003.
Then, based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the special hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 39(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying the effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Here, as shown in Fig. 39(C), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby displaying the effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

The VDP 65 also stores data relating to the presentation for consuming special reserves in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data relating to the look-ahead presentation stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. Specifically, the VDP 65 stores data relating to the presentation for consuming special reserves in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to make the data relating to the look-ahead presentation stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 invisible to the player by darkening the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 39, the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for clearing the advance notice hold, so the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 39 (D) (the angel character is stationary and not flying around). In other words, the angel is stationary at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Then, the MPU 62 executes the shift of normal holds, advance notice holds, and special holds by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The subsequent flow is the same as the flow when normal holds are consumed after the occurrence of the pre-reading performance (see FIG. 37).

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. As a result, each layer L1 to L3 of the frame buffer 69 becomes the same state as that shown in FIG.
As mentioned above, the angel's position remains stationary at the position it was at at the end of the previous look-ahead performance, so the MPU 62 can resume the look-ahead performance without causing the player to feel uncomfortable by clearing the drawing data (drawing data related to the performance for consuming special holds) that was created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold performance end command sent from the MPU 52.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the pattern display device 36 functions as a variable display means that executes a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Also, in this embodiment, the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold performance determination process of step S3006 functions as a first performance means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading performance (first performance) for a predetermined period (cumulative display duration time) based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 (the establishment of the first trigger).
In addition, in this reference form, the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 functions as a second effect means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect (second effect) for consuming the special hold that overlaps with the pre-reading effect and is different from the pre-reading effect during a specified period based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 (the occurrence of a second trigger different from the first trigger).
In this reference embodiment, the process of determining the advance notice hold effect continues to execute the pre-reading effect after the effect for consuming the special hold is completed.
In this reference form, continuing to execute the first performance is not limited to the state in which the first performance is operated after the second performance has ended, but also includes a state in which it is not operated (a stationary state) as long as it is displayed on the pattern display device 36.

With this, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved consumption performance even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a pre-reading performance for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can continue to execute the pre-reading performance after the special reserved consumption performance ends. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead performance when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special hold (the angel character is stationary and not flying around), and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead performance when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold.

According to this, the advance notice hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead performance when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special hold, and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead performance when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold. Therefore, even when a look-ahead performance is being executed, the look-ahead performance can be suspended to execute a performance for consuming the special hold, and the look-ahead performance can be resumed after the performance for consuming the special hold ends. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow players to enjoy the look-ahead performance.

Furthermore, in this reference form, the special hold presentation determination process of step S3002 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading presentation (first presentation) by storing data related to the pre-reading presentation in the third layer L3 (layer for first presentation) of the frame buffer 69, and the special hold presentation determination process of step S3002 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a presentation for consuming special holds (second presentation) by storing data related to the presentation for consuming special holds in the second layer L2 (layer for second presentation) of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.
In addition, in this reference form, the frame buffer 69 functions as an image synthesis means that displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers (each of the layers L1 to L3) including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority.
Then, the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 stores data related to the effect for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

According to this, the frame buffer 69 displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying the second layer L2, which has stored data relating to a special hold consumption performance based on a game ball entering the lower operating port 26 in the special hold performance determination process, on top of the third layer L3, which has stored data relating to a pre-reading performance based on a game ball entering the upper operating port 25 in the advance hold performance determination process. The special hold performance determination process stores data related to the performance for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead performance stored in the third layer L3. Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 is being executed, the performance for consuming the special hold based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 can be overwritten and executed, and after the performance for consuming the special hold ends, the data related to the performance for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased, so that the advance notice hold performance determination process in step S3006 can continue to execute the look-ahead performance.

In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the variable display is being executed on the pattern display device 36, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the variable display is executed on the pattern display device 36.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process of step S2202 (first hold storage means) for storing hold information in a first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, a process of step S2203 (second hold storage means) for storing hold information in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 for shifting the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

According to this, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb towards the execution area SAE, so even if a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25, a special hold consumption effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb can be executed based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26.

In this embodiment, the reserved information shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the reserved information stored in the second sub-side reserved area SRb toward the execution area SAE, but the reserved information stored in the second sub-side reserved area SRb does not have to be preferentially shifted toward the execution area SAE. For example, the reserved information stored in the first sub-side reserved area SRa and the second sub-side reserved area SRb may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in the order of ball entry.

In addition, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, if a performance for consuming a special reserve based on the reserve information stored in the second sub-side reserve area SRb is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 in a state where a look-ahead performance based on the reserved information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, the continuity of the look-ahead performance will be lost. According to this reference form, even in a state where the pattern display device 36 is executing a look-ahead performance for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a performance for consuming a special reserve, and can continue to execute the look-ahead performance after the performance for consuming a special reserve is completed, so that the player can play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead performance.

In this reference form, the first effect was a look-ahead effect, but it may also be another effect, such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved image to inform the player of the expected degree of the reserved jackpot.
In addition, in this reference form, the second performance is a performance for consuming the special reserve, but it may be, for example, a performance that encourages the player to press a push button, or a performance that gradually enlarges the image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. In addition, the second performance is not limited to a performance that displays an image on the pattern display device 36, but may be, for example, a performance that drives a role. In short, the first performance and the second performance may be any performance, and the second performance may be a performance that is executed overlapping with the first performance. Here, in this reference form, overlapping refers to a state in which the first performance cannot be seen by executing the second performance.

In addition, in this reference form, the hold occurrence processing of step S2102 functions as an information notification means for displaying a hold pattern associated with the hold information on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold information (sub-side hold information) stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543.
The reserved pattern generation process in step S2102 causes the reserved pattern to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in the first layer L1 (layer for reserved patterns), which has a higher priority than the second layer L2.

According to this, the reserved occurrence process displays the reserved pattern on the pattern display device 36 by storing data related to the reserved pattern in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2, so that when a pre-reading performance or a performance for consuming a special reserved pattern is executed, the reserved pattern displayed on the pattern display device 36 can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the reserved pattern.

In this reference form, the reserved pattern generation process displays the reserved pattern on the pattern display device 36 by storing data related to the reserved pattern in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2.
In response to this, the information notification means may cause the variable display means to display the reserved picture by storing data relating to the reserved picture in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.
According to this, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved picture by storing data relating to the reserved picture in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved picture displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved picture. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved picture on the variable display means without using a new layer.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second presentation means sets a special hold presentation end command in step S3004, thereby causing the pattern display device 36 to immediately end all presentations for consuming special holds at once.
According to this, the second presentation means immediately terminates all presentations for consuming special holds on the pattern display device 36 at once, so that the presentation for consuming special holds can be quickly terminated.

In this reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 functions as a first effect means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect by storing data relating to the look-ahead effect (first effect) in the third layer L3 (first effect layer) of the frame buffer 69 based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25, and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 functions as a second effect means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a special hold effect by storing data relating to a special hold effect (second effect) different from the look-ahead effect in the second layer L2 (second effect layer) of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26.

In contrast to this, the advance notice hold performance determination process of step S3006 and the special hold performance determination process of step S3002 may cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading performance and a performance for consuming the special hold by storing data relating to the pre-reading performance (first performance) and data relating to the performance for consuming the special hold (second performance) in the same layer.
In addition, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 may cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect and an effect for consuming the special hold based on the entry of a game ball into the same start ball entry means.

In this way, the first presentation means and the second presentation means only need to function as a specific presentation means that causes the variable display means to execute a specific presentation by storing data relating to a specific presentation in a layer for specific presentation based on the occurrence of a specific trigger.
In this reference form, the hold generation process in step S2102 causes data relating to a common image (hold pattern and each pattern row Z1 to Z3) that is different from a specific performance to be stored in a common layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the layers for specific performances (second layer L2 and third layer L3), thereby causing the common image to be displayed on the pattern display device 36.

Accordingly, the hold generation process in step S2102 displays a common image on the pattern display device 36 by storing data relating to a common image (hold pattern and each pattern row Z1 to Z3) that is different from the pre-reading performance and the performance for consuming special holds in a common layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the specific performance layers (second layer L2 and third layer L3). Therefore, when the pre-reading performance and the performance for consuming special holds are executed, the common image can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the common image displayed on the pattern display device 36.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second allocation table, which is referenced when a lottery is performed for the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the entry into the lower operating port 26, is easier to allocate to the "most favorable result" than the first allocation table, which is referenced when a lottery is performed for the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the entry into the upper operating port 25. In other words, the presentation for consuming the special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (the second presentation) is more useful to the player than the pre-reading presentation based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (the first presentation).

According to this, the effect for consuming special reserved balls is more useful to the player than the look-ahead effect, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the effect for consuming special reserved balls will be executed during the specified period. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the second presentation is more useful to the player than the first presentation by making it easier to allocate to the "most advantageous result," but it is sufficient that the second presentation is more useful to the player than the first presentation, and any type of presentation may be used for the first and second presentations.
For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute in parallel a first game round based on a ball entering a first starting entry section and a second game round based on a ball entering a second starting entry section, if the second game round is won or is likely to be won, a second effect may be executed in the second game round overlapping with the first effect being executed in the first game round, making the second effect more useful to the player than the first effect.
Also, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute an electric role play round related to a lottery for opening an electric role device based on a ball entering a through gate during an opening/closing execution mode, when an electric role play round is won or is likely to be won, a second effect may be executed in the electric role play round overlapping with a first effect during the opening/closing execution mode, so that the second effect may be more useful to the player than the first effect.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead performance by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G. Then, when the MPU 62 continues to execute the look-ahead performance after the performance for consuming the special hold ends, it executes the look-ahead performance by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G. In other words, the look-ahead performance was one type of performance.

In contrast, the first performance means may cause the variable display means to execute a first performance having multiple degrees of expectation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. For example, the MPU 62 may execute a low-expectation look-ahead performance by causing the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G, and execute a high-expectation look-ahead performance by causing the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Hot" so that it flies around the entire display screen G.

When the variable display means is caused to execute a first performance having multiple degrees of expectation over a predetermined period of time, the first performance means may change the degree of expectation of the first performance during the overlapping period during which the second performance means is executing the second performance. For example, the MPU 62 may execute a look-ahead performance by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G, and when the look-ahead performance is to be continued after the performance for consuming the special reserve ends, the look-ahead performance may be executed by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "Hot" so that it flies around the entire display screen G.

With this, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved consumption effect even when the pattern display device 36 is executing a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can change the expectation level of the pre-reading effect during the overlapping period in which the special reserved consumption effect is being executed in the special reserved effect determination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved consumption performance even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a look-ahead performance for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can continue to execute the look-ahead performance after the special reserved consumption performance ends. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The advance notice pending performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead performance when the special pending performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special reserved, and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead performance when the special pending performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special reserved. Therefore, even when the look-ahead performance is being executed, the look-ahead performance can be suspended to execute the performance for consuming the special reserved, and the look-ahead performance can be resumed after the performance for consuming the special reserved ends. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow the player to enjoy the look-ahead performance.

(3) The frame buffer 69 displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers, including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3, in order of priority. Therefore, an image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying the second layer L2, which has stored data relating to a special hold consumption effect based on a game ball entering the lower operating port 26 in the special hold effect determination process, on the third layer L3, which has stored data relating to a pre-reading effect based on a game ball entering the upper operating port 25 in the advance hold effect determination process. The special hold performance determination process stores data related to the performance for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead performance stored in the third layer L3. Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 is being executed, the performance for consuming the special hold based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 can be overwritten and executed, and after the performance for consuming the special hold ends, the data related to the performance for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased, so that the advance notice hold performance determination process in step S3006 can continue to execute the look-ahead performance.

(4) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed based on a game ball entering the upper operating port 25, an effect for consuming a special hold based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb can be executed based on a game ball entering the lower operating port 26.
(5) Even when the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the pattern display device 36 is executing a look-ahead performance for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, it can execute a performance for consuming special reserved balls, and can continue to execute the look-ahead performance after the performance for consuming special reserved balls has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without compromising the continuity of the look-ahead performance.

(6) The reserved picture generation process causes the reserved picture to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing data relating to the reserved picture in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. Therefore, when a pre-reading effect or an effect for consuming a special reserved picture is executed, the reserved picture displayed on the pattern display device 36 can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the reserved picture.
(7) The second presentation means immediately terminates all presentations for consuming special holds on the pattern display device 36 at once, thereby enabling the presentation for consuming special holds to be terminated quickly.

[Reference Form B]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment B of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.
In the reference form A, the advance notice hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead performance (the angel character remains stationary and does not fly around) when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special hold, and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead performance when the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold.
In contrast, in this reference form, the advance notice hold performance determination process differs from reference form A in that it continues to execute a pre-reading performance during the overlap period in which the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special hold.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processes different from those in reference embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the process of determining the performance pattern differs from that in reference embodiment A. The contents of the process of determining the performance pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern according to the reference form B of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern in order to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a content of the performance as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 in the same manner as in the reference form A. Note that in this reference form, the MPU 52 differs from the reference form A in that, as shown in FIG. 40, after executing the process of step S3003, it executes the process of step S3012B.

In step S3012B, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side reserved information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side reserved area by the reserve shift process is advance reservation information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is advance notice pending information, it executes the processes from step S3006 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is not advance notice hold information, it executes the processes from step S3011 onwards.
In this manner, in this reference form, when it is determined that advance notice hold information is stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area, the MPU 52 executes a performance for consuming the special hold in the special hold performance determination process, and also executes a pre-reading performance in the advance notice hold performance determination process.

<About the flow when consuming special reserve after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the reserved shift process is executed after it is determined that the special reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area. In other words, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where the performance for consuming the special reserved is executed after the state of FIG. 38 in the reference form A is reached. Specifically, FIG. 41 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, FIG. 41 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 41 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 41 (D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 41(A), the MPU 62 shifts the black sphere image, which is the special reserved image, placed on the pedestal B21, onto the execution pedestal AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 41(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image, the advance reservation image, and the special reserved image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the special reserved information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the reserved shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 41 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it determines in step S3001 that it is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation determination process in step S3002, and sets a special hold presentation command in step S3003.
Then, based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the special hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 41(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying the effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Here, as shown in Fig. 41(C), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby displaying the effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

The VDP 65 also stores data relating to the presentation for consuming special reserves in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data relating to the look-ahead presentation stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. Specifically, the VDP 65 stores data relating to the presentation for consuming special reserves in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to make the data relating to the look-ahead presentation stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 invisible to the player by darkening the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3012B is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3012B that it is notice hold information, it executes a notice hold performance determination process in step S3006, and sets a notice hold performance command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, as shown in Fig. 41 (D). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming the advance notice reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the advance notice reserve pattern placed on the base B12 in the example of Fig. 41) by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB and the base B11 in the example of Fig. 41). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 41 (D).

In the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 receives a second notice-on-hold performance command after determining that notice-on-hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice-on-hold performance command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Figure 42 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 42 (A) shows the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Figure 42 (B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 42 (C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 42 (D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 42(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere pattern, which is the normal reserved pattern placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52, and shifts the blinking white sphere pattern, which is the advance reserved pattern placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved pattern and the advance reserved pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 42(B).

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 42 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is notice hold information, in step S3006, executes a notice hold presentation determination process, and in step S3007, sets a notice hold presentation command.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, as shown in Fig. 42 (A). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve pattern placed on the base B11 in the example of Fig. 42) by utilizing the effect of the game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB in the example of Fig. 42). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 42 (D).

In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 receives a third notice-on-hold performance command after determining that notice-on-hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice-on-hold performance command is the same as the sum of the display durations of the previous and previous-previous play sessions. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42(A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the notice pending) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the notice pending presentation end command sent from the MPU 52. In other words, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 will receive the notice pending presentation end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, and so will clear the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the notice pending) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on this notice pending presentation end command.

In the example of Figure 42, since the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for consuming the special hold, the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 42 (C).

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the advance notice hold performance determination process continues to execute the pre-reading performance during the overlap period in which the special hold performance determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance for consuming the special hold.

According to this, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues to execute the look-ahead effect during the overlap period in which the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the effect for consuming the special hold, so the look-ahead effect can be executed continuously regardless of the effect for consuming the special hold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead effects.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1), (3) to (7) in the embodiment A, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(8) The advance notice reserved performance determination process continues to execute the look-ahead performance during the overlap period in which the special reserved performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the performance for consuming the special reserved, so the look-ahead performance can be continued regardless of the performance for consuming the special reserved. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead performance.

[Reference Form C]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment C of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the reference form A, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, in step S3004, it sets a special hold presentation end command, and the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the special hold) that had been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold presentation end command sent from the MPU 52.
In contrast, in this reference form, even if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side reserved information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special reserved information, if the sub-side reserved information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side reserved area is advance notice reserved information, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 does not immediately clear the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, which differs from reference form A.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processes different from those in reference embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the process of determining the performance pattern differs from that in reference embodiment A. The contents of the process of determining the performance pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining a presentation pattern according to the reference form C of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process of determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a content of the performance as a performance pattern. In the process of determining the performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE by the hold shift process is special hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation decision process in step S3002. In this special hold presentation decision process, the MPU 52 decides on a presentation for consuming the special hold. Based on the contents of this special hold presentation decision process, the MPU 52 also executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the presentation execution process in the aforementioned step S2004.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the special hold on the display screen G.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, it executes processing from step S3005 onwards.
In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side reserved information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side reserved area by the reservation shift processing is advance notice reserved information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation decision processing in step S3006. In this advance notice hold presentation decision processing, the MPU 52 determines the presentation (pre-reading presentation) for consuming the advance notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this advance notice hold presentation decision processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the presentation execution processing in the aforementioned step S2004.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice-on-hold performance command. The MPU 52 then stores the notice-on-hold performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the notice-on-hold performance command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice-on-hold performance command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the performance for consuming the notice reservation on the pattern display device 36 based on the notice reservation performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the performance for consuming the notice reservation on the display screen G.

In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes a process of accumulating the display duration. In this process, the MPU 52 calculates the accumulated display duration based on the content of the variable command each time it executes the process of determining the advance notice hold effect in step S3006, and stores the accumulated time in the RAM 54. In other words, the accumulated display duration indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the pre-reading effect. Here, the advance notice hold effect command described above includes information related to the accumulated display duration. Therefore, by receiving information related to the accumulated display duration from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 is able to grasp the starting point when flying the angel character and the subsequent movement. The initial value of the accumulated display duration is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

In step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade-out command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect fade-out command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect fade-out command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect fade-out command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the special hold effect fade-out command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming special holds) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that it fades out from the center to the periphery of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not advance notice pending information, it sets an advance notice pending performance end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice pending performance end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This advance notice pending performance end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the performance for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold performance end command sent from the MPU 52.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a cumulative reset process for the display duration. In this cumulative reset process for the display duration, the MPU 52 resets the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0".

In step S3004C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the performance for consuming the special hold) that was created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold performance end command sent from the MPU 52.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3013C, or after executing the process of step S3004C, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. Then, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the presentation pattern. In the other processes, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. Note that in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the pre-reading presentation.

<About the flow when consuming special reserve after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area, and then the performance for consuming the special reservation is terminated and the performance for consuming the notice reservation is executed. In other words, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the performance for consuming the special reservation is terminated and the performance for consuming the notice reservation is executed after the state of FIG. 39 in the reference form A is reached. Specifically, FIG. 44(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, FIG. 44(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 44(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 44(D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 44(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal reserved image, placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52, and shifts the blinking white sphere image, which is the advance reserved image, placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image and the advance reserved image on the display screen G of the image display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 44(B).

As shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed changing period by starting the changing display of multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the change start command sent from the MPU 52. In this high-speed changing period, the MPU 62 starts the changing display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of FIG. 44, the MPU 62 starts the changing display based on the change start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the win/lose lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 44 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is notice hold information, in step S3006, executes a notice hold presentation determination process, and in step S3007, sets a notice hold presentation command.
Then, based on the notice-on-hold performance command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the performance for consuming the notice-on-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character holding a signboard with the word "mystery" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, as shown in Fig. 44 (A). This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expectation of the reserve (the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve pattern placed on the base B11 in the example of Fig. 44) by utilizing the effect of a game round based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (the reserve related to the normal reserve pattern placed on the execution base AB in the example of Fig. 44). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in Fig. 44 (D).

Thereafter, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice hold information, in step S3013C, it sets a special hold effect fade-out command.
Then, based on the special hold effect fade-out command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming special holds) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 44 (C), so as to fade out from the center to the periphery of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.

Thus, in this reference embodiment, the processing of step S3013C functions as a second presentation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming the special hold by fading out.
According to this, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming the special hold by fading out, so that the presentation for consuming the special hold can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading performance in the advance notice hold performance determination processing, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold.
According to this, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading performance in the advance notice hold performance determination process, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold, so that the images of the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 can be changed simultaneously without the player being able to see the angel character, which is in a stationary state, and the performance for consuming the special hold can be ended and the pre-reading performance can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (6) in the embodiment A, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(9) The processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming special holds by fading out, so that the presentation for consuming special holds can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.
(10) The processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead performance in the advance notice hold performance determination process, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold, so that the performance for consuming the special hold can be ended and the look-ahead performance can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Reference Form D]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment D of the present invention.
In this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it has a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in FIG.
The two-tiered stage 7 comprises an upper stage 71 arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71, and a stage allocation mechanism 73 which allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 47 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 46 and 47, the upper stage 71 is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75 that guides the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and is distributed to the upper stage 71 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, thereby reaching the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve so that its lowest position is vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rises toward both the left and right horizontal sides. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed concave portion 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed concave portions 742 located adjacent to the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75.
Each recess 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game balls roll on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left-right direction, and are then discharged into the playing area via either a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75, or a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 and falls into the playing area. Specifically, the upper stage 71 is configured to allocate about 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75 and to allocate about 60% of the game balls to the route that falls into the playing area by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742.

The guide path 75 is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge section 752 that discharges the game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and causes them to fall into the game area. Here, the upper stage 71 is formed from a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game balls that have entered the guide path 75 can be seen.

The guide path 75 also includes a left guide section 753 which guides the game ball that enters the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 which guides the game ball guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753 by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 which guides the game ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges it from a discharge section 752 provided in the game area and causes it to drop.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area through a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 75 is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The lower stage 72 is equipped with a rolling surface 76 that rolls the game ball flowing down the play area, and a guide path 77 that guides the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 76 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 76 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and is distributed to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, thereby reaching the rolling surface 76.

The rolling surface 76 is located above the upper operating port 25 and has a mountain-shaped portion that protrudes vertically upward, and two valley-shaped portions that are located on both the left and right sides of the mountain-shaped portion and that sink vertically downward, and is formed with a greater curve than the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. This rolling surface 76 has a gently sinking concave portion 761 that is located above the upper operating port 25 (the top of the mountain-shaped portion), and two gently sinking concave portions 762 that are located at the bottom of the valley-shaped portions.

The concave portion 761 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 77.
Each recess 762 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, after rolling on the rolling surface 76 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left and right direction, the game ball is discharged into the game area through either a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 761 and enters the guide path 77, or a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 762 and falls into the game area. Specifically, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute about 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 into the route that enters the guide path 77 and distribute about 90% of the game balls into the route that falls into the game area by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 76 and the inclination angles of the concave portion 761 and each concave portion 762.

The guide path 77 includes a lower inlet 771 into which the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 76 can enter, and a discharge section 772 (discharge section 752) that discharges the game balls that entered from the lower inlet 771 and drops them into the game area. In this reference form, the discharge section 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge section 752 of the upper stage 71. Here, the lower stage 72 is formed of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game balls that have entered the guide path 77 can be seen. Note that, although in this reference form, the discharge section 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge section 752 of the upper stage 71, it does not have to be shared.

The guide path 77 includes a rear guide section 773 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower introduction section 771 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides the game ball by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2, and a front guide section 774 (front guide section 755) that guides the game ball that has been guided by the rear guide section 773 by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 toward the front of the game board 2, and then discharges and drops it from a discharge section 772 (discharge section 752) provided in the game area. In this reference embodiment, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide section 755 of the upper stage 71. In other words, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 communicates with the right guide section 754 of the upper stage 71, and the game ball guided toward the horizontal right direction by the right guide section 754 can be introduced inside. In this embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71, but this does not have to be the case.
Here, since the discharge section 772 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area through a route that leads to the guide path 77 is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage allocation mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71.

The rotating member 78 comprises a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, a first plate 782 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71), a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782, and a third plate 784 fixed to the horizontal rear side of the rotating shaft 781 (the left guide section 753 side of the upper stage 71) so as to be approximately parallel to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781 so that the rotation shaft 781 penetrates it along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally from the rotation shaft 781 toward the upper right, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally from the rotation shaft 781 toward the lower left. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. The second plate 783 has an end face on the opposite side to the rotation shaft 781 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface.
The third plate 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This third plate 784 has a permanent magnet 787 fixed to the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction.

The door element 79 comprises a rotating shaft 791 which is rotatably attached to the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 with the horizontal front-to-rear direction as its axial direction, and a rotating door 792 which is fixed to the rotating shaft 791 so as to close the inside of the left guide portion 753.
The revolving door 792 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically upper side is fixed to the rotation shaft 791. This revolving door 792 is equipped with a permanent magnet 793 fixed to the plate surface on the left side in the horizontal direction.

The following describes the process by which game balls flowing down the game area are allocated to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73.
In the state shown in FIG. 47, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage sorting mechanism 73 can be made to roll.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 47.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, Fig. 48(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and Fig. 48(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in Fig. 48(A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
Thereafter, the game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 48(B).

FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
49, when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and an end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation shaft 781 engages with an end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the side of the rotating member 78, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78 side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage allocation mechanism 73 cannot be rolled. In addition, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 does not rotate about the rotation shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 is not allocated to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is allocated to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As described above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The following describes the flow of game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71. Note that a description of the flow of game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing game balls that have been allocated to routes leading to balls entering guideways.
The game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that enters the guideway 75 travels down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751. The game ball BA1 that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753, as shown in Figure 50, and then guided horizontally to the left. The game ball BA1 that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753 collides with the revolving door 792.

Fig. 51 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball hits the revolving door. Specifically, Fig. 51(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, and Fig. 51(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792.
When the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, the door member 79 rotates about the rotation shaft 791 as shown in Fig. 51 (A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). When the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792 and the door member 79 rotates about the rotation shaft 791, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 comes close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.
Here, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 is attached to the revolving door 792 so that when it approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 as the door member 79 rotates, they repel each other.

Therefore, when the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the third plate 784 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 due to the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 787, so that the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in Fig. 51 (B) (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 782, 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78 to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes for falling into the game area.
52, the game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that leads to the game area falls into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, so the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 does not approach the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the rotating member 78 does not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding horizontally toward the left side, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is about 20%, but may be set to a different proportion.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78 to return to the state shown in FIG.

Thus, in this reference form, the two-stage 7 is equipped with a guide means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding game balls to the upper stage 71, and a prevention means (second plate 783) for preventing the guide means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 when the guide means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, when one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means blocks the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the second plate 783 serves both as the guiding means and the blocking means, but this is not essential, and the guiding means and the blocking means may be separate bodies.
In addition, in this reference form, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the preventing means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the preventing means may also prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
Furthermore, in this reference form, when the guiding means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the preventing means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71; however, the guiding means may also prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 based on other conditions, such as the passage of a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, the two-stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 (first stage) and a lower stage 72 (second stage) different from the upper stage 71. The guiding means guides the game ball to a rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The blocking means guides the game ball to a rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby blocking the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the preventing means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Therefore, even if the preventing means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72.

In this reference embodiment, the blocking means blocks the guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, but it may also block the guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by guiding the game ball to the play area, for example. In short, the blocking means only needs to be able to block the guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the stage does not need to include the lower stage 72.

As described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute about 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that enters the guide path 75, and distribute about 60% of the game balls to a route that falls into the game area. As described above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute about 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that enters the guide path 77, and distribute about 90% of the game balls to a route that falls into the game area. In other words, in this reference embodiment, the upper stage 71 is a stage that is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72.
According to this, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the upper stage 71 is a stage that is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.

In this reference embodiment, as described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that enters the guide path 75, and approximately 60% to a route that falls into the game area, and the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that enters the guide path 77, and approximately 90% to a route that falls into the game area, but the distribution rates may be set differently.
In addition, in this reference form, the upper stage 71 is set as a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72, but it may also be set as a stage that is less advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72, or it may be set to the same allocation rate as the lower stage 72.

In addition, in this embodiment, the blocking means has a blocking state (upright state of the second plate 783) that blocks the guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a non-blocking state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not block the guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The second stage 7 is equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the blocking means to either the blocking state or the non-blocking state. This stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the two-stage 7 is provided with a stage allocation mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state, and when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state, so that the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guidance means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but the blocking means may also be switched to a blocking state when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
Furthermore, in this reference form, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a blocking state when a single game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, but the blocking means may also be switched to a blocking state based on other conditions, such as the passage of a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means colliding with the revolving door 792.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

In this embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means collides with the revolving door 792. However, the blocking means may also be switched to the non-blocking state by, for example, utilizing a game ball that has been allocated to a route that falls into the game area. In short, the stage allocation mechanism 73 can switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. Specifically, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by a subsequent game ball BA2 different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

In this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a second plate-shaped portion 786 (contact means) of the first plate 782 that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means. This contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means. Specifically, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls that are distributed to the lower stage 72 is about 20%.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73 is provided with a contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts a portion (about 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference form, when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means collides with the revolving door 792, the stage allocation mechanism 73 brings the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, thereby switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 have a first guiding state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71, and a second guiding state (an upright state of the second plate 783) in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, and function as a stage guiding means for guiding the game ball to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72. This stage guiding means includes a stage allocation mechanism 73 (switching means) for switching the stage guiding means to either the first guiding state or the second guiding state.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either a first induction state or a second induction state, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches to either the first induction state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71, or the second induction state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Moreover, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second induction state (first induction state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 prevent the induction of the following game ball to the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72), so that the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being obstructed by the following game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the flow path through which the game balls flowing down the game area flow is described as a two-stage stage 7 with an upper stage 71 (first flow path) and a lower stage 72 (second flow path), but it may be applied to other flow paths. For example, the first flow path and the second flow path may be a gadget such as a crane, or may be a flow path leading to a big prize opening or a V prize opening.

According to the present embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) When one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means blocks the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the preventing means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Therefore, a player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 even if the preventing means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.

(3) The game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the upper stage 71 is a stage that is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.
(4) The two-stage 7 is provided with a stage sorting mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state, and the stage sorting mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(5) The stage allocation mechanism 73 cooperates with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means to switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.
(6) The stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by working in cooperation with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

(7) The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts a portion (about 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(8) The stage allocation mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(9) The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either a first induction state or a second induction state, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches to either the first induction state that guides the game ball only to the upper stage 71, or the second induction state that guides the game ball only to the lower stage 72, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Furthermore, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second induction state (first induction state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 prevent the induction of a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72), so that the game ball that has been guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the game balls present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75. If the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 is defined as the second game state, in the second game state, only the game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751). The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a guide means (guide path 75) that guides the game balls that have entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives the player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of a first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to this, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75 guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25 that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy a benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state at the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

In this way, the second plate 783 passes through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (upright state of the second plate 783) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate a second game state.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery may be executed as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, when the lottery as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated is not won, the game ball present in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) while the first game state is occurring is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786 can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the first game state is to be generated, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may regard the winning of the state generating lottery as a case where a specific condition is established, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize opening, a V prize opening, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783), and the second game state is a state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, in other words, a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching the first game state and the second game state may be a different configuration from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the big prize winning port, the flow path leading to the V prize winning port, the flow path leading to the general prize winning port, the flow path leading to each operation port, and the flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching each flow path leading to two types of V prize winning ports, or a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the upper operation port and the flow path leading to the lower operation port, or any other configuration for switching flow paths. In addition, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference form, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area in the game area that is different from the specified area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (upright state of the second plate 783) in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to the predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the game ball non-guiding state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatus) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. In addition, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with the first game ball and being displaced.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73 functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state based on the fact that a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71) that grants the player a first benefit (allocating approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 75), and the stage allocation mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that grants the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (allocating approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to the upper stage 71 where the player will receive a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 where the player will receive a second benefit different from the first benefit, so that the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference form, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enters the first profit entry area (upper entry section 751) that confers the first profit if the first condition (entering the upper entry section 751) is satisfied, and the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 enters the second profit entry area (lower entry section 771) that confers the second profit if the second condition (entering the lower entry section 771) that is different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to this, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751 that confers a first benefit if the first condition is met, and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 will enter the lower inlet section 771 that confers a second benefit if the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is met; therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area (game area) different from both the areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, in other words, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71 functions as a first benefit-granting area that allows a first gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit entry area (upper entry area 751) that grants a first benefit when a first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, and the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that allows a second gaming ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 to enter a second benefit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit when a second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met.
On the other hand, the first and second profit-giving areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a big prize winning port, a V prize winning port, a general prize winning port, each operation port, and a through gate, and may be any area as long as they can give a profit to the player. In addition, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first and second gaming states may be any gaming states, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference Form E]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment E of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment E of the present invention.
In the above-mentioned reference embodiment D, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it has a two-stage stage 7E provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 53.

The two-tiered stage 7E includes an upper stage 71E located vertically above (the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 located vertically below the upper stage 71E, and a stage allocation mechanism 73E that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 54 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity. Fig. 55 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 54 and 55, the upper stage 71E is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75E that guides the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in Figure 53), and is distributed to the upper stage 71E by the stage distribution mechanism 73E, thereby reaching the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve so that its lowest position is vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rises toward both the left and right horizontal sides. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed concave portion 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed concave portions 742 located adjacent to the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75E.
Each recess 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game balls roll on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left-right direction, and are discharged into the playing area through either a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75E, or a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 and falls into the playing area. Specifically, the upper stage 71E is configured to distribute about 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75E and distribute about 60% of the game balls to the route that falls into the playing area by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742.

The guide path 75E is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge section 752 that discharges the game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and causes them to fall into the game area. Here, the upper stage 71 is formed from a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game balls that have entered the guide path 75E can be seen.

The guide path 75E also includes a left guide section 753E which guides the game ball that enters the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 which guides the game ball guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753E by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 which guides the game ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges it from a discharge section 752 provided in the game area and causes it to drop.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area through a route that leads to the guide path 75E is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage allocation mechanism 73E includes a rotating member 78E located to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E.

The rotating member 78E comprises a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, a first plate 782 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71E), a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782, and a third plate 784E fixed to the horizontal rear side of the rotating shaft 781 (the left guide part 753E side of the upper stage 71E) so as to be approximately parallel to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781 so that the rotation shaft 781 penetrates it along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally from the rotation shaft 781 toward the upper right, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally from the rotation shaft 781 toward the lower left. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. The second plate 783 has an end face on the opposite side to the rotation shaft 781 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface.
The third plate 784E is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This third plate 784E has a protrusion 788E formed on the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction. This protrusion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical cylinder shape with the major axis direction being the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E.

The following describes the process by which game balls flowing down the game area are allocated to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in Figure 53), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 55.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

Fig. 56 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, Fig. 56(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and Fig. 56(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.
When a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in Fig. 56(A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 783 and 784E rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
Thereafter, the game ball rolls horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 56(B).

FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
57, when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and an end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation shaft 781 engages with an end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E on the side of the rotating member 78E, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78E side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, so that the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71E.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage allocation mechanism 73E cannot be rolled. In addition, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78E does not rotate around the rotation shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 is not allocated to the upper stage 71E. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is allocated to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784E is close to the left guide portion 753E of the guide path 75E, and the protrusion portion 788E of the third plate 784E is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753E through an opening 756E (see Figures 54 and 55) formed in the left guide portion 753E.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71E is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75E, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As described above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The flow of the game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71E will be described below. Note that the description of the flow of the game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing game balls that have been allocated to routes leading to balls entering guideways.
The game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that enters the guideway 75E travels down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751. As shown in Fig. 58, the game ball that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753E, and then guided horizontally to the left. The game ball BA1 that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753E collides with the protrusion 788E.

Fig. 59 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the protrusion 788E. Specifically, Fig. 59(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E, and Fig. 59(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E, the protrusion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical cylinder shape with the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E as the major axis direction, so that the third plate 784E is bounced up vertically by the game ball BA1. As a result, the third plate 784E rotates around the rotation shaft 781 as an axis, so that the rotating member 78E rotates around the rotation shaft 781 as an axis as shown in Figures 59(A) and 59(B) (see the counterclockwise arrow in Figure 59(B)). Also, each plate 782, 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA1 hits the protrusion 788E, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78E to return to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes for falling into the game area.
The game ball BA1 that is diverted to the route that falls into the play area will fall into the play area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742, as shown in Fig. 60. In this case, the game ball BA1 will not collide with the protrusion portion 788E, and therefore the rotating member 78E will not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding horizontally toward the left, so that game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is about 20%, but may be set to a different proportion.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 783 and 784E rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78E to return to the state shown in FIG.

Thus, in this reference form, when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means collides with the protrusion 788E, the stage distribution mechanism 73E causes the third plate 784E to bounce vertically upward, switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protruding portion 788E, so the player will pay attention to whether the third plate 784E is bounced up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (7) and (9) in the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(10) The stage allocation mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protrusion 788E, so that the player pays attention to whether the third plate 784E is bounced up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the game ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75E. If the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E is defined as the second game state, in the second game state, only the game ball present in a specific area (upper stage 71E) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751). And, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a guide means (guide path 75E) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives the player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of a first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to this, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75E guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25 that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy a benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state at the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

In this way, the second plate 783 passes through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (upright state of the second plate 783) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate a second game state.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery may be executed as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, when the lottery as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated is not won, the game ball present in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) while the first game state is occurring is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786 can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the first game state is to be generated, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may regard the winning of the state generating lottery as a case where a specific condition is established, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize opening, a V prize opening, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783), and the second game state is a state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E, in other words, a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching the first game state and the second game state may be a different configuration from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the big prize winning port, the flow path leading to the V prize winning port, the flow path leading to the general prize winning port, the flow path leading to each operation port, and the flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching each flow path leading to two types of V prize winning ports, or a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the upper operation port and the flow path leading to the lower operation port, or any other configuration for switching flow paths. In addition, these flow paths may be in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference form, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area in the game area that is different from the specified area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (upright state of the second plate 783) in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to the predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the game ball non-guiding state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatus) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. In addition, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with the first game ball and being displaced.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73E functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state based on the fact that a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71E) that grants the player a first benefit (allocating approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 75E), and the stage allocation mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that grants the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (allocating approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to the upper stage 71E where the player receives a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 where the player receives a second benefit different from the first benefit, so that the player can focus on where the game ball is being guided.

In addition, in this reference form, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enters the first profit entry area (upper entry section 751) that confers the first profit if the first condition (entering the upper entry section 751) is satisfied, and the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E enters the second profit entry area (lower entry section 771) that confers the second profit if the second condition (entering the lower entry section 771) that is different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to this, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751 that confers a first benefit if the first condition is met, and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E will enter the lower inlet section 771 that confers a second benefit if the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is met; therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area (game area) different from both the areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E, in other words, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71E functions as a first benefit-granting area that allows a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first benefit when a first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, and the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that allows a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E to enter a second benefit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit when a second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met.
On the other hand, the first and second profit-giving areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a big prize winning port, a V prize winning port, a general prize winning port, each operation port, and a through gate, and may be any area as long as they can give a profit to the player. In addition, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first and second gaming states may be any gaming states, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference Form F]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment F of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment F of the present invention.
In the above-mentioned reference embodiment D, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it is provided with a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 61.

The two-tiered stage 7F includes an upper stage 71F arranged vertically above (the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71F, and a stage allocation mechanism 73F that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 62 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 63 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the upper stage 71F is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75F that guides the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in Figure 61), and is distributed to the upper stage 71F by the stage distribution mechanism 73F, thereby reaching the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve so that its lowest position is vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rises toward both the left and right horizontal sides. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed concave portion 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed concave portions 742 located adjacent to the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75F.
Each recess 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game balls roll on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left-right direction, and are discharged into the playing area through either a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75F, or a route that runs along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 and falls into the playing area. Specifically, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute about 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F and distribute about 60% of the game balls to the route that falls into the playing area by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742.

The guide path 75F is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge section 752 that discharges the game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and causes them to fall into the game area. Here, the upper stage 71F is formed from a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game balls that have entered the guide path 75F can be seen.

The guide path 75F also includes a left guide section 753F that guides the game ball that enters the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 that guides the game ball guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753F by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 that guides the game ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges it from a discharge section 752 provided in the game area and causes it to drop.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area through a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 75F is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage allocation mechanism 73F includes a rotating member 78F located to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78F includes a rotating shaft 781F that is rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, a first plate 782 that is fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F), and a second plate 783 that is fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so that the rotating shaft 781F penetrates the first plate 782 in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally from the rotating shaft 781F toward the upper right and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally from the rotating shaft 781F toward the lower left. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotating shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end face that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.

The following describes the process by which game balls flowing down the game area are allocated to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in Figure 61), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 63.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 64 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
64, when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and an end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation axis 781F engages with an end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the side of the rotating member 78F, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78F side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, so that the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that reaches the stage allocation mechanism 73F cannot be rolled. In addition, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78F does not rotate around the rotation axis 781F due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, so the subsequent game ball BA2 is not allocated to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is allocated to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.

As described above, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75F, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding horizontally toward the left side, so that game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is about 20%, but may be set to a different proportion.

When a game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781F, and the rotation member 78F rotates about the rotation shaft 781F (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, the plate 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781F.
When the game ball hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781F engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78F to return to the state shown in FIG.

This embodiment can achieve the same effects and advantages as those of (1) to (4), (6), (7), and (9) in embodiment D.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the game ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75F. If the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is defined as the second game state, in the second game state, only the game ball present in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751). And, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a guide means (guide path 75F) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives the player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of a first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to this, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25 that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy a benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state at the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

In this way, the second plate 783 passes through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (upright state of the second plate 783) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate a second game state.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery may be executed as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, when the lottery as to whether or not the second game state is to be generated is not won, the game ball present in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) while the first game state is occurring is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786 can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the first game state is to be generated, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may regard the winning of the state generating lottery as a case where a specific condition is established, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize opening, a V prize opening, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783), and the second game state is a state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching the first game state and the second game state may be a different configuration from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the big prize winning port, the flow path leading to the V prize winning port, the flow path leading to the general prize winning port, the flow path leading to each operation port, and the flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching each flow path leading to two types of V prize winning ports, or a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the upper operation port and the flow path leading to the lower operation port, or any other configuration for switching flow paths. In addition, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference form, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area in the game area that is different from the specified area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (upright state of the second plate 783) in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to the predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the game ball non-guiding state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatus) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. In addition, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with the first game ball and being displaced.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73F functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state based on the fact that a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71F) that grants the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 75F), and the stage allocation mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that grants the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to the upper stage 71F where the player will receive a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 where the player will receive a second benefit different from the first benefit, so that the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference form, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enters the first profit entry area (upper entry section 751) that confers the first profit if the first condition (entering the upper entry section 751) is satisfied, and the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F enters the second profit entry area (lower entry section 771) that confers the second profit if the second condition (entering the lower entry section 771) that is different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to this, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751 that confers a first benefit if the first condition is met, and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F will enter the lower inlet section 771 that confers a second benefit if the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is met; therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area (game area) different from both the areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F functions as a first benefit-granting area that allows a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first benefit when a first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, and the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that allows a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F to enter a second benefit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit when a second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met.
On the other hand, the first and second benefit-granting areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a big prize winning port, a V prize winning port, a general prize winning port, each operation port, and a through gate, and may be any area that can grant a benefit to a player. In addition, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first and second gaming states may be any gaming states, for example, a normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and a specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference Form G]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment G of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of a game board according to the reference form G of the present invention.
In the above-mentioned reference form F, the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the pattern display device 36.
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it is provided with a two-stage stage 7G provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 65.

The two-tiered stage 7G includes an upper stage 71F arranged vertically above (the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71F, and a stage allocation mechanism 73G that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 66 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 67 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 66 and 67, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a rotating member 78G provided to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78G includes a rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, a first plate 782G fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F), a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782G, and a fourth plate 789G fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782G and fixed to the opposite side of the second plate 783 across the rotating shaft 781F.

The first plate 782G is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so that the rotating shaft 781F penetrates the first plate 782G in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782G has a first plate-shaped portion 785 that extends diagonally from the rotating shaft 781F toward the upper right. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotating shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end face that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.
The fourth plate 789G is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the left side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F.

The following describes the process by which game balls flowing down the game area are allocated to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G (see arrow A in Figure 65), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 67.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
As shown in Fig. 68, when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and an end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G opposite the rotation axis 781F engages with an end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78G side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, and has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 on the rotating member 78G side.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, so that the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that reaches the stage allocation mechanism 73G cannot be rolled. Also, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78G does not rotate around the rotation axis 781F due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, so the subsequent game ball BA2 is not allocated to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is allocated to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F.

As described above, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75F, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the fourth plate 789G protrudes vertically downward, so that the game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F collides with the fourth plate 789G.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G, the fourth plate 789G rotates about the rotation shaft 781F, and the rotation member 78G rotates about the rotation shaft 781F in a direction to release the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, the plate 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781F.
When the game ball hits the fourth plate 789G, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781F engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78G to return to the state shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a fourth plate 789G (contact means) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means. This contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73G is equipped with a contact means which switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball other than the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it will come into contact with all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means with peace of mind.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (4), (6), and (9) in the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(11) The stage allocation mechanism 73G is equipped with a contact means which switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball other than the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it will come into contact with all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means with peace of mind.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the game ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75F. If the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is defined as the second game state, in the second game state, only the game ball present in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751). And, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a guide means (guide path 75F) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives the player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of a first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783).
In addition, the fourth plate 789G functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G).
The second plate 783 functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to this, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25 that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy a benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 passes through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 can reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (upright state of the second plate 783) that restricts the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and an unrestricted state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783. The state is switched to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated at the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and switches to a non-restricted state when the first game state is generated at the fourth plate 789G. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state at the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state at the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate a second game state.

In this way, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the second game state is to be generated, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not the second game state is to be generated is not won, the game ball present in the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

As a result, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, making it possible to simplify the configuration of the fourth plate 789G.

In the present embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the fourth plate 789G may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F, and when the sensor detects a game ball, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery as to whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be ejected into the game area.

In this way, the fourth plate 789G may generate the first game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so that the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may regard the winning of the state generating lottery as a case where a specific condition is established, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize opening, a V prize opening, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783), and the second game state is a state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, a state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching the first game state and the second game state may be a different configuration from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the big prize winning port, the flow path leading to the V prize winning port, the flow path leading to the general prize winning port, the flow path leading to each operation port, and the flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching each flow path leading to two types of V prize winning ports, or a configuration for switching the flow path leading to the upper operation port and the flow path leading to the lower operation port, or any other configuration for switching flow paths. In addition, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F) different from a predetermined area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area in the game area that is different from the specified area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (an upright state of the second plate 783) in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. When the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G, the state is switched to the game ball non-guiding state.

Accordingly, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatus) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. In addition, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with the first game ball and being displaced.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73G functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state based on the fact that a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F) and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced.
The first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71F) that grants the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 75F), and the stage allocation mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that grants the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second game state to the upper stage 71F where the player will receive a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 where the player will receive a second benefit different from the first benefit, so that the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference form, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 enters the first profit entry area (upper entry section 751) that confers the first profit if the first condition (entering the upper entry section 751) is satisfied, and the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G enters the second profit entry area (lower entry section 771) that confers the second profit if the second condition (entering the lower entry section 771) that is different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to this, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751 that confers a first benefit if the first condition is met, and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G will enter the lower inlet section 771 that confers a second benefit if the second condition, which is different from the first condition, is met; therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area (game area) different from both the areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to another area different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which the game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, the state in which the game ball can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F functions as a first benefit-granting area that allows a first gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first benefit when a first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, and the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that allows a second gaming ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G to enter a second benefit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit when a second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met.
On the other hand, the first and second benefit-granting areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a big prize winning port, a V prize winning port, a general prize winning port, each operation port, and a through gate, and may be any area that can grant a benefit to a player. In addition, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the big prize winning port or inside the role. In addition, the first and second gaming states may be any gaming states, for example, a normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and a specific control state (opening and closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference Form H]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment H of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to embodiment H of the present invention.
In the above-mentioned reference form D, the stage allocation mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 , and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 .
In contrast, in this reference form, the stage distribution mechanism 73H differs from the reference form D in that it is equipped with a rotating member 78, a door member 79, and an obstruction means 70 that prevents game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

The baffle means 70 includes a baffle plate 701 provided at the upper left position of the rotation shaft 781 of the rotating member 78, a baffle plate drive unit 702 that drives the baffle plate 701, and a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotating member 78.

The baffle plate 701 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. This baffle plate 701 has a blocking state where it moves forward toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby blocking the game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and a non-blocking state where it moves backward toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby not blocking the game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
Further, the baffle plate 701 is connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 mounted on the rear side of the game board 2. This baffle plate 701 is driven by the baffle plate drive unit 702 to be set to either an obstructing state or a non-obstructing state.

The rotation detection sensor 703 is attached to the horizontal rear side of the rotation shaft 781 (the left guide section 753 side of the upper stage 71). This rotation detection sensor 703 detects two rotation states: when the second plate 783 is upright, and when the second plate 783 is approximately horizontal.

<Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device>
FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
70, the audio and light emission control device 5H includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotating member 78. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 that performs a protruding and retracting operation of the baffle plate 701.
The sound and light emission control board 51 has a driver circuit. The MPU 52 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to project and retract the baffle plate 701.

The following describes the process by which game balls flowing down the game area are allocated to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73H.
The MPU 52 periodically (for example, at a 2 msec cycle) detects two rotation states, that is, the upright state of the second plate 783 and the approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783, using the rotation detection sensor 703.

In the state shown in Figure 69, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H can be made to roll.
When the MPU 52 detects the rotation state of the second plate 783 in a substantially horizontal state, it executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to set the baffle plate 701 to the non-obstruction state. Note that in Fig. 69, the non-obstruction state is shown by illustrating the baffle plate 701 in white.
Since the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstructing state, the game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H (see arrow A in Figure 45), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 69.
The game ball BA 1 rolling horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
71, when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and an end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation shaft 781 engages with an end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the side of the rotating member 78, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78 side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As described above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The following describes the flow of game balls that are distributed to the route that falls into the game area of the upper stage 71. Note that the flow of game balls that are distributed to the route that enters the guideway 75 of the upper stage 71 and the flow of game balls that are distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 are the same as those of the reference form D.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes for falling into the game area.
72, the game ball BA1 that has been diverted to the route that leads to the game area falls into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, so the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 does not approach the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the rotating member 78 does not rotate.

When the MPU 52 detects the rotational state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, it executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to repeatedly set the baffle plate 701 to a non-obstruction state and an obstruction state at a predetermined cycle. Note that in FIG. 71, the obstruction state is indicated by illustrating the baffle plate 701 with diagonal lines, and in FIG. 72, the non-obstruction state is indicated by illustrating the baffle plate 701 with white outlines.

Here, the MPU 52 has a high-frequency obstruction mode in which the period during which the obstruction plate 701 is set to a non-obstruction state is short (e.g., 0.3 sec) and the period during which it is set to an obstruction state is long (e.g., 0.7 sec), thereby causing a high frequency of obstruction that obstructs game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and a low-frequency obstruction mode in which the period during which the obstruction plate 701 is set to a non-obstruction state is long (e.g., 0.7 sec) and the period during which it is set to an obstruction state is short (e.g., 0.3 sec), thereby causing a low frequency of obstruction that obstructs game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

When the MPU 52 detects a transition in the rotation state of the second plate 783 from a substantially horizontal state to an upright state of the second plate 783, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to select either the high frequency obstruction mode or the low frequency obstruction mode, and executes drive control of the obstruction plate drive unit 702 in the mode that is selected in the lottery. Note that the MPU 52 executes a lottery to select the high frequency obstruction mode and the low frequency obstruction mode with a probability of 50% each, but may execute a lottery to select with a different probability.

When the baffle plate 701 is set to the obstructing state by the MPU 52, the succeeding game ball BA2 is obstructed by the baffle plate 701 and cannot reach the stage allocation mechanism 73H, as shown in Fig. 71. In this case, the succeeding game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and is allocated to the lower stage 72.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding horizontally toward the left side. However, since the baffle plate 701 is provided at a position vertically above the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 786, the game ball blocked by the baffle plate 701 does not collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.

On the other hand, when the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state by the MPU 52, the subsequent game ball BA2 reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H without being obstructed by the baffle plate 701, as shown in Fig. 72. However, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H cannot be rolled. In addition, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 does not rotate about the rotation shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 is not distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
Here, in a state where the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the following game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. Note that the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the ratio of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 when the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-baffle state by the MPU 52 is about 20%, but may be set to a different ratio.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotating shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This causes the rotating member 78 to return to the state shown in FIG.
Incidentally, when the MPU 52 detects the rotation about the rotation shaft 781 after detecting the rotation state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, it immediately executes the drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to set the baffle plate 701 to a non-obstruction state, so that the rotation about the rotation shaft 781 is not hindered by the baffle plate 701.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the second game state has a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

Therefore, in this reference form, the first probability state indirectly specifies that in the first game state, a second game state is generated in the second game state generating means based on the first probability by generating a first game state in the first game state based on the first probability.
In addition, in this reference form, the second probability state indirectly specifies that in the first game state, the second game state generating means generates a second game state based on the second probability, by causing the first game state to be generated in the first game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, in the second game state.

In other words, in this reference form, the first game state has a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) in which the second game state generating means generates a second game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) in which the second game state generating means generates a second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability.
In this embodiment, the first probability state and the second probability state indirectly specify that the second game state is generated in the second game state generating means based on the first probability and the second probability, but they may be specified directly. In short, the first game state only needs to have a first probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on the first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to this, the first game state has a first probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, so that the player pays attention to the probability state of the second game state generating means and plays in the hope of entering the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those of the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(12) Since the first game state has a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second game state generating means and plays in the hope of the second probability state being reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by differentiating the period during which the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state and the obstruction state, but any configuration may be adopted as long as the probability of generating the first game state can be different in the first game state generating means. For example, the second game state may be a state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the obstruction state as the first probability state, and a state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state as the second probability state.
In addition, in this embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the baffle plate 701 to a non-obstruction state and an obstruction state, but as long as the probability of generating the first game state can be made different in the first game state generating means, a configuration different from the baffle plate 701 may be adopted. For example, the second game state may be such that a motor is attached to the rotating shaft 781 instead of the baffle plate 701, and a state in which a large load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 to make it difficult to rotate is the first probability state, and a state in which a small load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 to make it easy to rotate is the second probability state.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of a game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
In the reference form, the game board 2 was equipped with a variable winning device 27, a cover 29 arranged to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27, and a through gate 31 arranged on the right side of the center.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the game board 2 is provided with a lower right game means 8 provided in the area on the lower right side of the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 73, and this lower right game means 8 differs from the reference embodiment in that it is provided with a variable winning device 27I, a cover 29I, and a through gate 31I.
Furthermore, the player can hit the game ball to the right by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum extent, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like and directing the game ball to the lower right game means 8.

The game board 2 has a number of openings, large and small, formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The game board 2 also has a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry section) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry section) 26, a variable winning device 27I, and an outlet 28, 281, which are provided at each opening. The game board 2 also has through gates 31, 31I provided on the left and right sides of the center, respectively, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided in the center, and the like. Furthermore, the game board 2 has a number of nails NL planted in the game area to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, various components (gimmicks) such as windmills, etc.

Each of the various winning openings of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the variable winning device 27I is equipped with a detection sensor 301-304 (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and these detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with a detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with a detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with a detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27I is equipped with a detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. The detection sensors 301-304 may be any type that can individually detect the entry of a game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball enters the general winning port 24. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball enters the upper operating port 25 and if a ball enters the lower operating port 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball enters the variable winning device 27I. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each operating port 25, 26 may be different.

Figure 74 is an enlarged front view of the game board with the vicinity of the lower right game means enlarged. In Figure 74, the vertical direction is the Z axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z axis are the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The lower right game means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I described above, and also, as shown in Figure 74, a crown 81 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, a rotation distribution means 82 provided in the area to the right of the crown 81, an open start port 83 provided on the lower right side of the rotation distribution means 82, an open winning device 84 provided in the area below the open start port 83, adjacent to the right side of the variable winning device 27I, an outlet 281 provided in the area to the right of the open winning device 84, and a variable winning through gate 85 provided in the area to the left of the through gate 31I.

The variable winning device 27I includes a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter the large winning opening 271, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 for driving the opening/closing door 272. In other words, the variable winning device 27I has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27 in the reference embodiment except for its position.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27I.

Here, the cover 29I is provided in the area below the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84, and includes an opaque panel 292 that is formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 from the front through the window portion 122.
In this embodiment, the cover 29I has only an opaque panel 292, but as in the above-mentioned reference form, it may also have a transparent panel that is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 can be viewed from the front side.

The big prize opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. As described above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of game balls. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the big prize opening 271. This opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to close the opening of the big prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and sinks into the game board 2 to open the opening of the big prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the opening/closing execution mode, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening/closing execution mode.
The opening and closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state and game balls can enter the large prize opening 271. In the opening and closing execution mode, the period from when the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state until it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The outlet 281 is provided in the area to the right of the open winning device 84. Game balls that flow down to the right of the open winning device 84 are discharged from the game area through this outlet 281. The flow path of the outlet 281 merges with the flow path of the outlet 28, and game balls that pass through the outlet 281 are detected by a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 78) that detects game ball entry. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 281, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning ports.

The through gate 31I has the same configuration as the through gate 31 in the above-mentioned reference embodiment, except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31I has a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each of the through gates 31, 31I, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area, but also the manner in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area after passing through an opening without being discharged from the game area. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlets 28 and 281, the entry of game balls into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Also, the entry of balls into the through gates 31 and 31I and the variable winning through gate 85 refers to the continued flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry of balls into the through gates 31 and 31I and the variable winning through gate 85 is also referred to as winning, just like the entry of balls into various winning ports.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged plan view of the crane as seen from vertically above.
As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the crane 81 is equipped with a guide rail 811 that guides the game balls that have flowed down to the left side of the rotational distribution means 82 to the crane 81, a disk-shaped turning surface 812 that rotates the game balls guided to the crane 81 via the guide rail 811, and a side wall 813 provided along the periphery of the turning surface 812.
In addition, the guide rail 811 guides the game ball to the rotating surface 812 so that it follows the side wall 813.

The swivel surface 812 includes three holes 814 to 816 formed at a predetermined distance from its center and equally spaced from one another, and a protrusion 817 formed at its center and having three side surfaces that slope downward toward each of the holes 814 to 816. The swivel surface 812 also slopes downward from the side wall 813 toward each of the holes 814 to 816 (see FIG. 74).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crane 81 via the guide rail 811 will revolve around the revolving surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enter one of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in Figure 75).

As shown in FIG. 74, the Kluen 81 also includes a guide tube 818 that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 814 and allows it to enter the variable winning through gate 85 via the hole 801 formed in the play area, and a guide tube 819 that guides the game ball that has entered the holes 815 and 816 and allows it to enter the through gate 31I via the hole 802 formed in the play area.

The rotation distribution means 82 includes a rotating body 821 formed in a generally V-shape, a rotating shaft 822 that rotatably supports the rotating body 821, and a rotating body drive unit 823 that drives the rotating body 821. The game board 2 has a hole 803 formed in the upper region of the rotating body 821.
The rotating body 821 has a guide surface 824 formed on the +Z axis direction side and formed in a V shape by combining two inclined surfaces, a guide surface 825 formed on the +X axis direction side, and a guide surface 826 formed on the -X axis direction side.

Fig. 76 is a diagram showing a crane guiding state in which the rotating body is rotated. Fig. 77 is a diagram showing a starting port guiding state in which the rotating body is rotated.
As shown in Figures 74, 76, and 77, the rotating body 821 has three guiding states: a normal guiding state, a crane guiding state, and a starting hole guiding state.
In the normal guidance state, as shown in FIG. 74, the rotating body 821 guides the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 into the hole 803 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the pivot axis 822 and positioning the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction side and stopping it (see arrow B in the figure).

Here, the guide surface 824 is inclined downward as it approaches the -Y axis direction, so that the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 is guided into the hole 803 by utilizing this inclination.
The rotary sorting means 82 also includes a guide pipe 827 that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 803 and causes it to enter the through gate 31I via the hole 802 formed in the game area.

In the Kruun guidance state, as shown in Figure 76, the rotating body 821 rotates around the pivot axis 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 to the guide rail 811 of the Kruun 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the start port guide state, as shown in Figure 77, the rotating body 821 rotates around the pivot axis 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating body 821 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The rotating body drive unit 823 drives the rotating body 821 to set the rotating body 821 to either the normal guiding state or the specific guiding state.
In the normal guiding state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction side and stop it.
In the specific guidance state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the -Z axis direction side, and then rotates the rotating body 821 to swing back and forth between the crane guidance state (see Figure 76) and the starting port guidance state (see Figure 77).

The opening start opening 83 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This opening start opening 83 is equipped with a detection sensor 307I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 307I is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Based on the detection result, the pachinko machine 1 opens the opening winning device 84. Note that when a ball enters the opening start opening 83, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning openings.

The open winning device 84 is equipped with an open winning opening 841 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter the game, an opening/closing door 842 for opening and closing the open winning opening 841, and an open winning drive unit 843 that drives the opening/closing door 842.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like and guiding the game ball to the open winning device 84.

The open winning opening 841 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction by applying router processing. This open winning opening 841 is equipped with a detection sensor 308I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 308I is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open winning opening 841.

The opening and closing door 842 is formed in a generally flat plate shape with a wavy surface on the vertically upper side, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the open winning opening 841. This opening and closing door 842 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the open winning opening 841, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and sinks into the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the open winning opening 841.

The open winning drive unit 843 drives the opening/closing door 842 to set the opening/closing door 842 to either an open state or a closed state.
Specifically, the opening and closing door 842 is normally set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the opening and closing door 842. When the game ball enters the opening start opening 83, the opening and closing door 842 is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter the opening and closing door 842 under certain conditions.

Here, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 842 is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball moves to the left over time while swaying on this plate surface, and the opening/closing door 842 can hold multiple game balls until it is set to the open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start opening 83.
In addition, since the opening/closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 is located adjacent to the right side of the opening/closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, the game ball that moves to the left over time while being swayed on the panel surface of the opening/closing door 842 will then move to the left along the panel surface of the opening/closing door 272.

The variable winning through gate 85 is equipped with a detection sensor 309I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 309I is disposed on the back side of the game board 2. When a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.
The variable winning through gate 85 becomes a trigger for starting a round game when the opening and closing execution mode is selected in an internal lottery and the mode is switched to the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 wins the internal lottery for switching to the opening and closing execution mode and switches to the opening and closing execution mode, and a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state and a predetermined number of round games are started.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 78 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 78, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, a sound and light emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 is also equipped with a payout control device 46 and a power supply and launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to make the payout device 48 described above pay out game balls. The power supply and launch control device 47 executes launch control to make the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above launch game balls.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control of the game (main control) and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 includes a board box that houses the main control board 41 and the like. This board box may be equipped with a trace means that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be a configuration in which a board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and a joining part (crimping part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when each case body is separated is provided, or a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesion target when peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundaries between multiple case bodies. In addition, the trace structure may be a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 which constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is an element which combines, on a chip, the ROM 43, the RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit acting as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 431, a distribution table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to the multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light emission control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric role drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, the open winning drive unit 843 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 842 of the open winning device 84, the main display unit 34, and the role display unit 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. In addition, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open prize drive unit 843 to open and close the open prize opening 841. In each game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display unit 34 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each operation port 25, 26. In addition, the MPU 42 executes display control of the role display unit 35 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 31, 31I.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and a power supply/launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the open winning device 84, the out ports 28, 281, the through gates 31, 31I, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, the MPU 42 performs winning judgments (ball winning judgments) for the various winning ports, the out ports 28, 281, the through gates 31, 31I, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. The MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning judgment for the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players when playing) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, the payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is equipped with a power supply unit for use during power outages, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use during power outages supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4 even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply/launch control device 47 also executes launch control to cause the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply/launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch the game balls.

FIG. 79 shows an allocation table that stores random number values related to the allocation destination of each type of jackpot.
In this embodiment, the first allocation table and the second allocation table are different from those in the above-mentioned reference embodiment.
Specifically, the random number values related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 78) of a ROM 43 provided as an allocation information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 79. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 79(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 79(b).
The MPU 42 compares these allocation tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table which is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which has been shifted from the reserved area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is based on an entry into the upper operating port 25.
As shown in Fig. 79(a), the first allocation table allocates a number of allocation results, including "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit few rounds high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", "explicit few rounds high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result", "10 to 14" is allocated to "non-explicit few rounds high probability result", "15 to 19" is allocated to "explicit few rounds high probability result", and "20 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result".

The second allocation table is a table which is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which has been shifted from the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is based on an entry into the lower operating port 26.
As shown in Fig. 79(b), the second allocation table allocates three allocation results, namely, "low probability result", "most favorable result", and "most favorable result with special game". Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result", "10 to 14" is allocated to "most favorable result", and "15 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result with special game".
Here, the "most advantageous result with special game" differs from the "most advantageous result" in that a special game is added by the lower right game means 8, and in the pachinko machine 1, the "most advantageous result with special game" is treated the same as the "most advantageous result" except for this point. The special game by the lower right game means 8 will be described in detail later.

Each allocation result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) A winning/losing lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (2) A support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. (3) A state of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 27I in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, the differences in the winning/losing selection modes (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low probability mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."
"Non-explicit few rounds high probability result", "explicit few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "best result with special game" are allocation results in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high probability mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win".

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. This high frequency support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of times of play reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning or losing lottery results in a "jackpot win".
The "high probability result with fewer rounds", "most favorable result", and "most favorable result with special play" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win".

The differences in the manner in which the variable winning device 27I is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, the main control device 4 executes processes different from those in the reference embodiment. Below, the details of the various processes in this embodiment that differ from those in the reference embodiment are described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 executes steps S101 to S107I periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals) as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a read process of the multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I. In this read process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 judges that the detection sensors 301-304, 308I corresponding to the various winning ports have detected the winning of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the prize balls, and transmits the set command to the payout control device 46. For example, when the MPU 42 judges that the detection sensor 308I corresponding to the open winning device 84 has detected the winning of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command for instructing the payout of 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number, to the payout control device 46.
In addition, the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on a prize ball command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 executes an update of the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value, it clears the random number initial value counter CINI by returning it to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 42 executes updates of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, it resets the value of each of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for through play. In this winning process for through play, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31, 31I detects the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 stores the value of the electric role opening counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reservation area 443. In addition, the MPU 42 sets a command for turning on the third reservation lamp unit 373, and transmits this set command to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the third reserved lamp unit 373 based on a command sent from the MPU 42. As described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, 31I is a maximum of four, and the third reserved lamp unit 373 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the operating port.

In step S106I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for a variable win. In this winning process for a variable win, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 309I corresponding to the variable win through gate 85 detects the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 sets a variable win flag in the RAM 44. This variable win flag is a flag for identifying the occurrence of a ball winning into the variable win through gate 85.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a variable winning flag by substituting 1 into a predetermined area of the RAM 44, and clears the variable winning flag by substituting 0 into the predetermined area of the RAM 44.

In step S107I, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the open winning.
The winning process for the open prize will be described in detail below.

<Open prize winning process>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the open winning.
In the winning process for the open winning, the MPU 42 executes steps S4001 to S4004 as shown in FIG.
In step S4001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the opening start opening 83 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 307I corresponding to the opening start opening 83 has detected the entry of a game ball.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has not entered the opening start hole 83, it ends the winning process for the opening winning without executing the processes in and after step S4002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has entered the opening start hole 83, the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 whether or not a special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44. This special game in progress flag is a flag for specifying that a special game is being executed by the lower right game means 8.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not a special game is being played by referring to a special game flag stored in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 sets the special game flag when a special game is being played, and clears the special game flag when the special game is ended. The transition to the special game and the end of the special game will be described in detail later.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game in progress flag is not set, it ends the winning process for the open winning without executing the processes in and after step S4003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game in progress flag is set, in step S4003, it executes an opening execution process for the open winning port 841. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning drive unit 843 to set the opening and closing door 842 to an open state.
In this embodiment, the duration until the opening/closing door 842 is set to the closed state again after being set to the open state is 0.17 sec., but the duration may be different from this, and multiple durations specified with different lengths of time may be switched between.

In step S4004, the MPU 42 sets an open winning command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the open winning command set in step S4004 to the sound and light emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the open winning processing.
In addition, based on the open winning command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 842 has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start processing.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in Fig. 82. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it executes step S711I instead of step S711.

In step S711I, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag; when the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "non-expressed low round high probability result", it sets a non-expressed low round high probability result flag; when the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "expressed low round high probability result", it sets a specified low round high probability result flag; when the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result", it sets a most advantageous result flag; and when the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result with special play", it sets a most advantageous result with special play flag. After that, the MPU 42 executes the process from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 executes the determination of the allocation result by referring to these flags.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in Fig. 83. Note that, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes steps S815I and S816I after executing step S808, and executes step S817I before executing step S811, which is different from the above-mentioned reference embodiment.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it executes the processes in and after step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes in and after step S817I.

First, the process (the process after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 judges whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended. If the MPU 42 judges in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if the MPU 42 determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805, it sets "2" to an opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 42 to specify the total number of times that the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27I is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result," i.e., that the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a few rounds with high probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2". If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a few rounds with high probability result, that is, if it determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result", "most favorable result", or "most favorable result with special play", then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15". This round counter RC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to identify the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with different ending conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a round number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" and an opening/closing number-defined mode to which the machine enters when the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

The round number-defined mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to a value set in a round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends on the condition that the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end on the condition that the number of rounds has been played.

The pachinko machine 1 executes one opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 for one round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening and closing door 272 to an open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening and closing door 272 to a closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls in the big winning hole 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing the process of step S808, in step S815I, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S816I, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S816I that the most favorable outcome flag with special play is set, it ends the game state transition process.

After executing the processing of step S805 or step S807, and if it is determined in step S816I that the most favorable result flag with special play has not been set, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the opening in step S809. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and can be any time.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/lose result corresponds to the transition to the open/close execution mode, it sets the timer counter T to the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of game result, except when it determines in step S816I that the most favorable result flag with special game is set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different between the game result of a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result" and the game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process after step S817I) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S817I, the MPU 42 executes a special game execution process.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in FIG.
In step S4101, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a most advantageous result flag with a special game is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, it ends the special game execution process without executing the processes in and after step S4102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, it determines in step S4102 whether or not the special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is not set, it executes the processing in step S4103 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is set, it executes the processing in step S4106 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S4103 onward) when it is determined in step S4102 that the special game flag is not set by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S4103, the MPU 42 clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4104, the MPU 42 sets a rotation sorting start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation sorting start command set in step S4104 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the rotation distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to a specific guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4105, the MPU 42 sets the special game in progress flag in the RAM 44. After that, the MPU 42 ends the special game execution process.

Next, the process (the process from step S4106 onward) when it is determined in step S4102 that the special game flag is set by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S4106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a variable winning flag is set in the RAM 44. In other words, the MPU 42 executes a special game, clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S4103, and then determines whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 85 and the variable winning flag has been set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is not set, it ends the special game execution process without executing the processes in and after step S4107.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is set, the MPU 42 sets a rotation allocation stop command in step S4107. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation allocation stop command set in step S4107 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the rotation distribution stop command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4108, the MPU 42 clears the special game in progress flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4109, the MPU 42 sets the most advantageous result flag in the RAM 44 in place of the most advantageous result flag with the special game stored in the RAM 44.

In step S4110, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and can be any value.

In step S4111, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S4111 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing from step S811 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the special game execution process in step S817I, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening opening process in step S811.
In step S812, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 clears the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S814, and then executes a transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.

<Electrical configuration of the audio/light emitting control device>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
85, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information and is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, a rotating body drive unit 823 that rotates the rotating body 821 of the rotation distribution means 82, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4. The MPU 52 also executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to rotate the rotating body 821.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.
In this embodiment, the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 is performed by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, but it may also be performed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4 or the MPU 62 of the display control device 6.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processes different from those in the reference embodiment. Below, the contents of the various processes in this embodiment that differ from those in the reference embodiment are described.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2401 to S2412, and then executes the processes of steps S2414I to S2419I, as shown in FIG. 86, before executing the process of step S2413, in substantially the same manner as in the above-mentioned reference embodiment.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes in and after step S2409.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has received each command, in step S2402, it determines whether the game result is a "most advantageous result" (including a "most advantageous result with special play") or a "low probability result" based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most favorable result" (including "most favorable result with special game") or a "low probability result", it executes a pattern determination process corresponding to the type of game result in step S2403. In this pattern determination process, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most favorable result" (including "most favorable result with special game"), it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the pay line L, and if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", it determines information related to a combination of patterns having the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the pay line L. The odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special play") or a "low probability result," then in step S2404, it determines whether or not the game result is a "normal losing result" based on the content of the type command.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not a "normal losing result", that is, when the game result is any of a "special losing result", a "non-indicated few rounds high probability result", and a "indicated few rounds high probability result", it executes a common symbol determination process in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that will not be selected in the case of a "normal losing result" in the winning/losing lottery, rather than a combination of symbols having the same numbers. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information related to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a final stop result to be displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by drawing lots or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in the reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining a presentation pattern in step S2407. In this process of determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to a presentation table previously stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. Note that in step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selected performance pattern.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable display start command and the stop result command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 starts the variable display and then finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L.

After executing the process of step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2409 and onward.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that it has received an opening command, it executes the processes in and after step S2410, similarly to the above-mentioned embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2414I.

In step S2414I, the MPU 52 determines whether a rotation sorting start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that the rotation sorting start command has not been received, it executes the processing of step S2416I and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that it has received a rotation allocation start command, it executes a process of determining a rotation allocation start effect in step S2415I. In the process of determining the rotation allocation start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the rotation allocation start effect by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This rotation allocation start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation allocation means 82 has been set to a specific guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
Furthermore, in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 to start rotation of the rotating body 821, thereby setting the rotation allocation means 82 to a specific guiding state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a rotation sorting start performance command related to the rotation sorting start performance determined in the rotation sorting start performance determination process of step S2415I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation sorting start performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotation sorting start performance command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the rotation distribution start performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the rotation distribution start performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the rotation distribution start performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415I, or if it is determined in step S2414I that a rotation sorting start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I whether a rotation sorting stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that the rotation sorting stop command has not been received, it executes the processing of step S2418I and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that it has received the rotation sorting stop command, it executes a process of determining a rotation sorting stop effect in step S2417I. In the process of determining a rotation sorting stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the rotation sorting stop effect by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This rotation sorting stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation sorting means 82 has been set to the normal guiding state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
Furthermore, in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 821, thereby setting the rotation allocation means 82 to the normal guiding state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a rotation sorting stop effect command related to the rotation sorting stop effect determined in the rotation sorting stop effect determination process of step S2417I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation sorting stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotation sorting stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the rotation sorting stop performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the rotation sorting stop performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the rotation sorting stop performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417I, or if it is determined in step S2416I that a spin distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I whether an open winning command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that it has not received an open winning command, it executes the processing from step S2413 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that it has received the opening winning command, it executes a process of determining an effect for opening winning in step S2419I. In the process of determining an effect for opening winning, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for opening winning by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This effect for opening winning is an effect for notifying the player that the opening and closing door 842 of the opening winning device 84 has been set to the open state.

In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected performance.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a performance command for the opening prize winning effect determined in the process of determining the performance for the opening prize winning effect in step S2419I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the performance command for the opening prize winning effect in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This performance command for the opening prize winning effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the opening and winning performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the opening and winning performance command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec period) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the opening and winning performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2419I, or if it is determined in step S2418I that an open winning command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2413 onwards.

In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processes. In the other processes, the MPU 52 executes processes for progressing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, for example, based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the performance determination process.

<Special game flow>
Fig. 87 is a diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device before a special game is executed. Fig. 88 is a diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device in a state where a special game is executed.
The MPU 42 executes a special game when a "big win" is obtained in the winning/losing lottery and the lottery is allocated to the "most advantageous result with special game".
In addition, the MPU 42 can allocate to the "most favorable result with special play" in the allocation lottery only when a lottery for the type of jackpot is conducted based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26.

First, the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed variation period by starting the variable display of the multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52. In this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in the "most favorable result," the MPU 62 notifies the winning/losing lottery result by displaying a combination of symbols having the same numbers ("7-7-7" in this embodiment) stopped on the pay line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 52 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed (see FIG. 87(A)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most favorable result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number-specified mode in which rounds are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 87(B).

Here, in the opening and closing execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guiding state. Therefore, the game ball shot toward the right hitting route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803, enters the opening start hole 83 or the out hole 281, or flows down toward the opening winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In this embodiment, a game ball launched toward the right-hand hitting route is capable of entering the open starting port 83 or the out port 281, or flowing down toward the open winning device 84; however, the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open starting port 83 may be changed so that the game ball cannot enter the open starting port 83 or the out port 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84.

The game ball that enters the hole 803 passes through the guide pipe 827, enters the through gate 31I, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
A game ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 27I or the open winning device 84 will win in the large winning opening 271 when the large winning opening 271 is opened.
In addition, since no special game is being played in the “most advantageous result”, the opening and closing door 842 is not set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the opening start opening 83 .

After the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose selection mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the maximum rotational amount of the launch handle 16, thereby shifting the landing position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the game ball landing in the lower operating port 26 rather than the upper operating port 25.
Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guide state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right hitting route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and is then guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803 (see arrow B in FIG. 74).

Then, the game ball that entered the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I through the guide tube 827, and if the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of this through gate 31I corresponds to the transition to the electric role opening state, the electric role 261 provided in the lower operating port 26
is opened in a predetermined manner.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game while preventing the game balls from being reduced too much.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can gain an advantage in the game by firing the game ball toward the right hitting route.

Next, the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed variation period by starting the variable display of the multiple pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52. In this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in the "most favorable result with special game," the MPU 62 notifies the winning/losing lottery result by displaying a combination of symbols having the same numbers ("7-7-7" in this embodiment) stopped on the pay line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command received from the MPU 52 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed (see FIG. 87(D)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 executes the special game.
In this embodiment, if the allocation lottery results in the "most favorable result with special play," the MPU 62 displays a combination of symbols having the same numbers (in this embodiment, "7, 7, 7") stopped on the effective line L as the stopped result, but the MPU 62 may also display a combination of symbols (for example, "V, V, V") different from the combination that was allocated to the "most favorable result" in the allocation lottery on the effective line L.

In the "Most Favorable Result with Special Game", the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation allocation means 82 has been set to a specific induction state based on the rotation allocation start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
Specifically, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific guidance state, and the MPU 62 announces the result of the win/lose lottery, and then executes the rotation distribution start performance selected by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, as shown in Figure 88 (A).
Here, when the rotation distribution start performance is executed, the win/lose lottery mode remains set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode because the high frequency support mode flag is cleared by the processing of step S815I. In other words, when the rotation distribution start performance is executed, the same state as when the win/lose lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in an "undisclosed high probability result for a few rounds (latent high probability result for a few rounds)" is selected.

In the rotation distribution start performance, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. The MPU 62 also displays an angel character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and suggests to the player to land the game ball in the crown by having this character say, "Aim for the crown!!"

When the rotation distribution means 82 is in a specific induction state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the -Z axis direction side, and then rotates the rotating body 821 to swing back and forth between the crane induction state (see Figure 76) and the starting port induction state (see Figure 77) to swing left and right.

In the Kruun guided state, as shown in FIG. 76, the rotating body 821 guides the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating body 821 to the guide rail 811 of the Kruun 81 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the rotation axis 822 and positioning the guide surface 825 on the +Z axis direction side (see arrow B in the figure).

The game ball guided by the crane 81 will revolve around the revolving surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enter one of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in Figure 75).
When a game ball enters a hole 814 of the crane 81, the game ball is guided by a guide tube 818 to a hole 801 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 801 to enter a variable winning through gate 85.

When a game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state based on the rotation distribution stop command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
In the rotation distribution stop performance, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. Also, the MPU 62 displays the letter "V" on the entire display screen G of the pattern display device 36 as shown in Fig. 88 (B). After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the normal guiding state of the rotary sorting means 82, as shown in FIG. 74, the rotating body 821 guides the game balls that have flowed down toward the rotating body 821 into the hole 803 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the pivot axis 822 and positioning the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction side and stopping it (see arrow B in the figure).

The opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number-specified mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum number of times set to 15, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 88(C).

Here, in the opening and closing execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guiding state. Therefore, the game ball shot toward the right hitting route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803, enters the opening start hole 83 or the out hole 281, or flows down toward the opening winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In this embodiment, a game ball launched toward the right-hand hitting route is capable of entering the open starting port 83 or the out port 281, or flowing down toward the open winning device 84; however, the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open starting port 83 may be changed so that the game ball cannot enter the open starting port 83 or the out port 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84.

The game ball that enters the hole 803 passes through the guide pipe 827, enters the through gate 31I, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
A game ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 27I or the open winning device 84 will win in the large winning opening 271 when the large winning opening 271 is opened.
In addition, since a special game is not being executed in the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing door 842 is not set to an open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start opening 83.

After the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose selection mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right (see FIG. 87 (C)).

On the other hand, when a game ball enters holes 815, 816 of the crane 81, the game ball is guided by a guide tube 819 to a hole 802 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 802 to enter the through gate 31I.
In this case, since the MPU 52 does not receive the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, the specific guidance state of the rotation distribution means 82 is maintained.

In the start port guide state, as shown in Figure 77, the rotating body 821 rotates around the pivot axis 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating body 821 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).
The game ball guided to the open start port 83 will enter the open start port 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see Figure 77).
In this embodiment, the game ball guided to the open start port 83 is designed to enter the open start port 83 or the out port 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84, but it may also be designed to only enter the open start port 83.

During the execution of the special game, the opening and closing door 842 is set to an open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start opening 83 .
When the opening/closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start opening 83, the MPU 52 recognizes that the opening/closing door 842 has been set to the open state based on the opening winning command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the opening winning performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5, as shown in Figure 88 (D).

In the open winning performance, the MPU 62 displays a right-facing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. The MPU 62 also displays a devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and suggests to the player that the opening and closing door 842 has been set to the open state by having this character say "Charging!!".
During the execution of the special game, the MPU 62 executes the opening and winning performance every time a game ball enters the opening start opening 83 until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Then, when the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 62 displays the letter "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 as described above (see FIG. 88(B)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening and closing execution mode.

Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a specific ball entry means that initiates a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, the special game execution processing functions as a specific control starting means that transitions the game state to a specific control state in the main control unit 4 and then starts game play in the specific control state when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.
The lower right game means 8 functions as a special game execution means that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control unit 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state and before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution processing.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a lower right game means 8 that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to the specific control state and before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process, so the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 function as a special game payout means for paying out a game ball when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game ball.
In addition, in this embodiment, the crane 81 functions as a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and delaying the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) that leads to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to this configuration, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when playing a special game.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with a crane 81 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, so that after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until game play in the specific control state begins can be delayed by the special game execution process.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the right-hand hitting route, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

In this embodiment, the crane 81 is used as the ball entry delay means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delay the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. For example, in this embodiment, the crane 81 has three holes 814 to 816, but it may have only one hole as long as it can guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delay the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. In addition, for example, by adopting other mechanisms such as a rotating body, a gate mechanism, or a gentle slope, it may be possible to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delay the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are used as the special game payout means, but any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to pay out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area. For example, a big winning port, a V winning port, a general winning port, or each operating port may be used.
In addition, in this embodiment, a right-hand hit route is adopted as the special game path leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means, but a left-hand hit route may also be adopted, or other routes such as a route inside the large prize opening or a route inside the reel may also be adopted.

Here, in this embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 award a benefit to the player depending on the length of the delay in time it takes for the game ball to enter the variable winning through gate 85 at the crane 81.
Therefore, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 also function as a period benefit granting means that grants a benefit to the player depending on the length of the period from when the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state until the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state.

With this configuration, the opening start opening 83 and the opening winning device 84 can award a player a benefit according to the length of time between when the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state and when the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are used as a periodic benefit providing means, and after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the opening winning device 84 is opened a number of times depending on the length of the period before the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state, thereby increasing the number of game balls and providing a benefit to the player. However, anything that can provide a benefit to the player may be provided to the player. For example, the player may be provided with information that is useful to the player, or a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously may be provided.

In this embodiment, the opening start port 83 functions as a special game ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and the opening winning device 84 functions as a game ball payout means for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area. The opening winning device 84 is set so that the game balls flowing down the game area can enter the game balls when they enter the opening start port 83.

With this configuration, the opening winning device 84 is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the opening start port 83, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the opening start port 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the open winning device 84 has a non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and a restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is restricted from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83. Specifically, the open winning device 84 is in the non-restricted state when the special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44, and is in the restricted state when the special game in progress flag is not set in the RAM 44.
The winning process for the open prize functions as a regulated state switching means which switches the open prize winning device 84 to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the open prize winning device 84 to a regulated state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a prize-winning process for open prize-winning that switches the open prize-winning device 84 to a non-restricted state when a special game is being played, and switches the open prize-winning device 84 to a restricted state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the game ball aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and does not fire the game ball aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the open winning device 84 has a non-restricted state that does not restrict the game ball flowing down the game area from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and a restricted state that restricts the game ball flowing down the game area from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83.The winning process for the open winning switches the open winning device 84 to the non-restricted state when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the restricted state when a special game is not being played.

In response to this, the open winning device 84 may have a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the open start port 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter, and a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period longer than the predetermined period from when the game ball enters the open start port 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter. When configured in this way, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played.

According to this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the game ball aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and does not fire the game ball aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a left-hitting route (first path) that leads to the upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26, and a right-hitting route (second path) that leads to the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 and is different from the left-hitting route.
The aforementioned restriction state switching means and ball entry waiting period switching means function as a launch suppression means that suppresses the launch of the game ball toward the right-hand hitting route by switching the state of the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84.

With this configuration, the launch suppression means switches the state of the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 to suppress the launch of the game ball toward the right-hitting route, so that the player will not launch the game ball toward the right-hitting route aiming at the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the launch suppression means suppresses the launch of the game ball toward the right-hit route by switching the open winning device 84 to a non-restricted state or a restricted state, or by switching the open winning device 84 to a first ball-entry waiting period or a second ball-entry waiting period; however, any state of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 may be switched as long as the launch of the game ball toward the right-hit route can be suppressed by switching the state of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84. For example, the launch suppression means may suppress the launch of the game ball toward the right-hit route by switching the length of time for which the open winning device 84 is set to allow ball entry.

In this embodiment, the crane 81 has a swirl surface 812 that rotates the game ball. The hole 814 functions as a guide hole that allows the game ball rotating on the swirl surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and the holes 815 and 816 function as non-guidable holes that prevent the game ball rotating on the swirl surface 812 from being guided to the variable winning through gate 85.

With this configuration, the crane 81 has a hole 814 that allows the game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and holes 815 and 816 that prevent the game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 from being guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until the start of play in the specific control state can be delayed by the special game execution process, and the configuration of the crane 81 can be simplified.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, a rotation distribution means 82 is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotational distribution means 82 has a distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the right-hit route is distributed to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, and a distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the right-hit route is not distributed to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means.
The special game execution process functions as a distribution state switching means which switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific induction state when a special game is being executed (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and which switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a normal induction state when a special game is not being executed (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a specific induction state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a normal induction state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44), so that the player plays the game in the hope that the rotation allocation means 82 will be switched to the specific induction state by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route so that in the specific guidance state, the game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the game balls are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the rotation distribution means 82 is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2 in the specific guidance state, and not to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2 in the normal guidance state, so that the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

Here, in this embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit granting means that grants a benefit to a player based on the game balls distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82 after the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary distribution means 82, but before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85.
In this case, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and may be any means that can allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game area. For example, the specific ball entry means may be a big winning port, a V winning port, a general winning port, or each operating port.
Furthermore, the specific benefit granting means does not have to be the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when the game balls that flow down the game area enter the game area, and as long as it can grant a benefit to the player, it may grant information that is useful to the player, or it may grant a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously, or it may grant any kind of benefit.

With this configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary allocation means 82, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 provide a profit to the player based on the game balls allocated to them by the rotary allocation means 82, so that the player can enjoy the profit provided by the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, in the specific guidance state, the rotational distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the rotational distribution means 82 distributes the game ball flowing down the right-hand hitting route so as not to distribute the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary distribution means 82 that distributes game balls flowing down the game area to either a first distribution flow path or a second distribution flow path. The rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

In this embodiment, the first distribution flow path is a flow path leading to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and the second distribution flow path is a flow path that does not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. However, any flow path may be used for the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path. For example, the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path may be a flow path leading to a large prize winning port, a flow path leading to a V prize winning port, a flow path leading to a general prize winning port, a flow path leading to each operating port, or a flow path leading to a through gate. In addition, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize winning port or inside the role.

Here, in this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game, and the flow path in the Kruun guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out if a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the start port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the lower operating port 26 and the outlet 28 function as a tertiary ball entry area that, when a ball enters the lower operating port 26, pays out three prize balls, and, when a ball enters the outlet 28, gives the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not allowing the payout of prize balls, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this tertiary ball entry area.
The rotational distribution means 82 has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state (normal guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path of the crane induction state or the flow path of the start port induction state, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path of the normal induction state, and is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the flow path in the Krun guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state and the flow path in the normal guidance state are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2. Specifically, the flow path in the Krun guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state form a flow path on the front side of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guidance state forms a flow path on the back side of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the flow path in the Kruun guide state, the flow path in the starting port guide state, and the flow path in the normal guide state are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls. Also, even if three flow paths must be formed in the flow path when a game ball is launched toward one route, namely, the flow path in the Kruun guide state, the flow path in the starting port guide state, and the flow path in the normal guide state, the pachinko machine 1 can effectively use the limited space of the game board 2 to efficiently form the flow paths.

In this embodiment, the flow path in the Kruun guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state have different surfaces that form the three flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2, but the number of flow paths does not have to be three, and can be two or more.
In addition, in this embodiment, the flow path in the Kruun guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state form a flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guidance state forms a flow path on the back surface of the game board 2, but the surface forming the flow path in the front-back direction of the game board 2 may be reversed.

Here, in this embodiment, the flow path in the Kruun guidance state is equipped with a Kruun 81 as a ball entry delay means that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to a variable winning through gate 85, and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, if another game ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guidance state enters the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 before the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 enters the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 performs a granting process to immediately pay out 15 prize balls and grant a secondary profit.

According to this configuration, if another game ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guided state enters the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 while the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 is waiting to enter the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 performs a granting process to immediately execute the payout of 15 prize balls and grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can enjoy the secondary benefit by immediately executing the payout of 15 prize balls even while waiting for the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 to enter the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 causes the game balls to flow down only to either the flow path in the Krun guide state or the flow path in the start port guide state in the specific guide state. And, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the flow path in the Krun guide state and the flow path in the start port guide state is the same.
In contrast, the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the Krun guide state and the flow path in the starting port guide state do not have to be the same; for example, the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the starting port guide state may be greater than the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the Krun guide state.

According to this configuration, in the specific induction state, the rotation distribution means 82 causes the game balls to flow only into either the flow path in the Kruun induction state or the flow path in the starting port induction state, and since the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the starting port induction state is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the Kruun induction state, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game balls will flow into the flow path in the Kruun induction state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 has a lower right game means 8 that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 has shifted the game state to the specific control state and before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(2) The lower right game means 8 is equipped with an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flows down the game area and enters the game area, so that a player can increase the number of game balls when playing a special game.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with a crane 81 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, so that after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until game play in the specific control state begins can be delayed by the special game execution process.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the right-hand hitting route, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

(3) The opening winning device 84 is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the opening start opening 83, so the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the opening start opening 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(4) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a prize-winning process for opening and winning, which switches the opening and winning device 84 to a non-restricted state when a special game is being played, and switches the opening and winning device 84 to a restricted state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the game ball aiming at the opening start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and does not fire the game ball aiming at the opening start hole 83 when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(5) The crane 81 is provided with a hole 814 that enables a game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and holes 815 and 816 that prevent a game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 from being guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the special game execution process can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the crane 81.
(6) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotation distribution means 82 that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(7) The pachinko machine 1 has a special game execution process that switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific induction state when a special game is being played (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), and switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a normal induction state when a special game is not being played (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), so that the player plays the game in the hope that the rotation distribution means 82 will be switched to the specific induction state by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(8) The rotation distribution means 82 is configured so that in a specific guidance state, the game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in a normal guidance state, the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

(9) The opening start opening 83 and the opening winning device 84 can provide a player with a benefit according to the length of time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4 until when the game in the specific control state is started by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(10) After the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 provide a profit to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82 before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, so that the player can enjoy the profit provided by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(11) The rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls to a first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes game balls to a second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

(12) The pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path of the crane induction state or the flow path of the start port induction state, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path of the normal induction state, and is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(13) The flow path in the Kruun guide state, the flow path in the starting port guide state, and the flow path in the normal guide state are formed on different faces in the front-back direction of the game board 2, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game balls. Also, even if three flow paths, the flow path in the Kruun guide state, the flow path in the starting port guide state, and the flow path in the normal guide state, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the pachinko machine 1 can effectively use the limited space of the game board 2 to efficiently form the flow paths.

(14) In the pachinko machine 1, if another game ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guided state enters the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 while the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 is waiting to enter the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 performs a granting process to immediately execute the payout of 15 prize balls and grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can enjoy the secondary benefit by immediately executing the payout of 15 prize balls even while waiting for the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 to enter the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 89 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In Figure 89, the vertical direction is the Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are the X-axis and the Y-axis. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I described above, as well as a crane 81, a rotation distribution means 82, an opening start opening 83, an opening winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a variable winning through gate 85.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower right game means 8 is different from the first embodiment in that, as shown in Fig. 89, it is provided with a movement distribution means 86J instead of the rotation distribution means 82. In this embodiment, the game board 2 is also different from the first embodiment in that it does not have a hole 803.

The movement distribution means 86J includes a moving body 861 formed in a generally triangular prism shape, a moving shaft 862 that supports the moving body 861 so as to be movable along the horizontal direction (X-axis direction), and a moving body drive unit 863 that drives the moving body 861. The game board 2 has an elongated hole 804 through which the moving shaft 862 is inserted and which is formed so that the longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction.
The movable body 861 has a guide surface 864 formed on the −X axis direction side, and a guide surface 865 formed on the +X axis direction side.

Fig. 90 is a diagram showing a crane guidance state in which the moving body is moved. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing a starting port guidance state in which the moving body is moved.
As shown in Figures 89 to 91, the moving body 861 has three guidance states: a normal guidance state, a crane guidance state, and a starting port guidance state.
In the normal guidance state, as shown in FIG. 89, the moving body 861 moves the moving axis 862 toward the +X-axis direction to bring the guide surfaces 864, 865 to a stop below the group of nails NL3J, thereby allowing the game ball that has flowed down between the group of nails NL3J and the group of nails NL4J to flow down and be guided to the through gate 31I (see arrow B in the figure).

In the Kluan guidance state, as shown in FIG. 90, the movable body 861 guides the game ball flowing down toward the movable body 861 to the guide rail 811 of the Kluan 81 by moving the movable axis 862 toward the -X axis direction and positioning the guide surface 864 between the nails NL3J group and the nails NL4J group (see arrow B in the figure).
In the start port guide state, as shown in FIG. 91, the movable body 861 further moves the moving axis 862 toward the -X axis direction to position the guide surface 865 between the nails NL3J group and the nails NL4J group, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the movable body 861 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The moving body drive unit 863 drives the moving body 861 to set the moving body 861 to either the normal guidance state or the specific guidance state.
In the normal guidance state, the moving body drive unit 863 moves the moving shaft 862 in the +X-axis direction to bring the guide surfaces 864, 865 to rest below the group of nails NL3J.
In the specific guidance state, the movable body drive unit 863 moves the movable shaft 862 toward the -X axis direction to position the guide surfaces 864, 865 between the nails NL3J group and the nails NL4J group, and then moves the movable body 861 to swing back and forth between the crane guidance state (see Figure 90) and the starting hole guidance state (see Figure 91).

In this embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special game execution process differs from that of the first embodiment. The contents of the special game execution process in this embodiment are described below.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in Fig. 92. Note that, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104J instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107J instead of the process of step S4107, which is different from the first embodiment.

In step S4104J, the MPU 42 sets a movement allocation start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the movement allocation start command set in step S4104J to the audio and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the movement allocation start command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to a specific guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107J, the MPU 42 sets a movement allocation stop command. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the movement allocation stop command set in step S4107J to the audio and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the movement allocation stop command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state, and executes a specified process.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
93, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information and is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, a moving body drive unit 863 that moves the moving body 861 of the movement allocation means 86J, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4. Also, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to move the moving body 861.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.
In this embodiment, the drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 is performed by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, but it may also be performed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4 or the MPU 62 of the display control device 6.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the performance determination processing differs from that in the first embodiment. The content of the performance determination processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 94. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the processes of steps S2414J to S2417J instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414J, the MPU 52 determines whether a movement allocation start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that the movement allocation start command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2416J.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that it has received a movement allocation start command, it executes a process for determining a movement allocation start effect in step S2415J. In the process for determining a movement allocation start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the movement allocation start effect by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This movement allocation start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to a specific guidance state. In this embodiment, the movement allocation start effect is the same effect as the rotation allocation start effect in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
Furthermore, in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 to start the movement of the moving body 861, thereby setting the movement allocation means 86J to a specific guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a movement allocation start performance command related to the movement allocation start performance determined in the movement allocation start performance determination process of step S2415J. Then, the MPU 52 stores the movement allocation start performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This movement allocation start performance command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the movement allocation start performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the movement allocation start performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the movement allocation start performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415J, or if it is determined in step S2414J that a movement allocation start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J whether a movement allocation stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that the movement allocation stop command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2418I.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that it has received a movement sorting stop command, it executes a process for determining a movement sorting stop effect in step S2417J. In the process for determining a movement sorting stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the movement sorting stop effect by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This movement sorting stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the movement sorting means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state. In this embodiment, the movement sorting stop effect is the same as the rotation sorting stop effect in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
Furthermore, in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 to stop the movement of the moving body 861, thereby setting the movement allocation means 86J to the normal guiding state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a movement sorting stop effect command related to the movement sorting stop effect determined in the movement sorting stop effect determination process of step S2417J. The MPU 52 then stores the movement sorting stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This movement sorting stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the movement sorting stop performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the movement sorting stop performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the movement sorting stop performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417J, or if it is determined in step S2416J that a movement allocation stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2418I onwards, as in the first embodiment.

In this way, in this embodiment, the movement distribution means 86J functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a moving distribution means 86J that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the moving distribution means 86J will distribute the game ball to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the moving distribution means 86J is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the moving allocation means 86J has an allocation-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the right-hand hit route is allocated to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, and a non-allocation state (normal guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the right-hand hit route is not allocated to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means.
The special game execution process functions as a distribution state switching means which switches the movement distribution means 86J to a specific guidance state when a special game is being executed (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and which switches the movement distribution means 86J to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being executed (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the movement allocation means 86J to a specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the movement allocation means 86J to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44), so that the player plays the game in the hope that the movement allocation means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit granting means that grants a benefit to a player based on the game balls allocated to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving allocation means 86J before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, after the moving allocation means 86J allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85.
In this case, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and may be anything that can enter the game ball flowing down the game area. Also, the specific benefit providing means does not have to be the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and may provide information useful to the player, provide a situation that allows the game of the pachinko machine 1 to be advantageous, or provide anything that can provide a benefit to the player.

With this configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving allocation means 86J, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 provide a profit to the player based on the game balls allocated to them by the moving allocation means 86J, so that the player can enjoy the profit provided by the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game, and the flow path in the Kruun guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out if a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the start port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the lower operating port 26 and the outlet 28 function as a tertiary ball entry area that, when a ball enters the lower operating port 26, pays out three prize balls, and, when a ball enters the outlet 28, gives the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not allowing the payout of prize balls, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this tertiary ball entry area.
The moving distribution means 86J has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state (normal guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path of the crane induction state or the flow path of the start port induction state, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path of the normal induction state, and is equipped with a movement allocation means 86J that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the moving distribution means 86J, in the specific guide state, causes the game balls to flow down only to either the flow path in the Krun guide state or the flow path in the starting port guide state. And, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the flow path in the Krun guide state and the flow path in the starting port guide state is the same.
In contrast, the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the Krun guide state and the flow path in the starting port guide state do not have to be the same; for example, the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the starting port guide state may be greater than the rate at which game balls are caused to flow down the flow path in the Krun guide state.

According to this configuration, in the specific guide state, the movement distribution means 86J causes the game ball to flow only into either the flow path in the Kruun guide state or the flow path in the starting port guide state, and since the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the starting port guide state is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the Kruun guide state, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will flow into the flow path in the Kruun guide state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment, in addition to the same actions and advantages as those (1) to (5), (9), and (14) in the first embodiment, the following actions and advantages can be achieved.
(15) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a moving distribution means 86J that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game hoping that the moving distribution means 86J will distribute the game balls to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(16) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special game execution process that switches the movement allocation means 86J to a specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when a special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44), and switches the movement allocation means 86J to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when a special game in progress flag is not set in the RAM 44), so that the player plays the game in the hope that the movement allocation means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(17) The open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving allocation means 86J, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the moving allocation means 86J allocates the game balls to the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84, and the player can enjoy the benefits provided by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(18) The pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path of the crane induction state or the flow path of the start port induction state, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path of the normal induction state, and is equipped with a movement distribution means 86J that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Third Embodiment
A third embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 95 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In Figure 95, the vertical direction is the Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are the X-axis and the Y-axis. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I described above, as well as a crane 81, a rotation distribution means 82, an opening start opening 83, an opening winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a variable winning through gate 85.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower right game means 8 is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided with a rotation distribution means 87K instead of the rotation distribution means 82, as shown in Fig. 95. This rotation distribution means 87K is a windmill attached to the game board 2. In this embodiment, the game board 2 is also different from the first embodiment in that it does not have a hole 803.

Fig. 96 is a diagram showing a state where the game ball is guided to the crown by the rotation distribution means. Fig. 97 is a diagram showing a state where the game ball is guided to the opening start hole by the rotation distribution means.
As shown in FIG. 96, the rotary sorting means 87K receives game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K, and rotates counterclockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure), guiding the game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K into the guide rail 811 of the crane 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
As shown in FIG. 97, the rotary distribution means 87K receives game balls flowing down toward the rotary distribution means 87K, rotates clockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure), and guides the game balls flowing down toward the rotary distribution means 87K to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

In this embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special game execution process differs from that of the first embodiment. The contents of the special game execution process in this embodiment are described below.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in Fig. 98. Note that, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104K instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107K instead of the process of step S4107, which is different from the first embodiment.

In step S4104K, the MPU 42 sets a special game start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the special game start command set in step S4104K to the sound and light emission control device 5.
In addition, the sound and light emission control device 5 recognizes that a special game has started based on a special game start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107K, the MPU 42 sets a special game stop command. Also, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the special game stop command set in step S4107K to the sound and light emission control device 5.
In addition, the sound and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the special game has been stopped based on the special game stop command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
99, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information and is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control device 4 .
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the performance determination processing differs from that in the first embodiment. The content of the performance determination processing in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the performance determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 100. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the processes of steps S2414K to S2417K instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414K, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a special game start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that the special game start command has not been received, it executes the processing of step S2416K and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that it has received a special game start command, it executes a process of determining a special game start effect in step S2415K. In the process of determining the special game start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game start effect by referring to a table for effects previously stored in the ROM 53. This special game start effect is an effect for notifying the player that a special game has started. In this embodiment, the special game start effect is the same effect as the rotation allocation start effect in the first embodiment.

In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected performance.

The MPU 52 further sets a special game start effect command related to the special game start effect determined in the special game start effect determination process of step S2415K. The MPU 52 then stores the special game start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game start performance on the pattern display device 36 based on the special game start performance command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec period) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the special game start performance selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415K, or if it is determined in step S2414K that a special game start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K whether a special game stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that it has not received a special game stop command, it executes processing from step S2418I onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that it has received a special game stop command, it executes a process of determining a special game stop effect in step S2417K. In the process of determining a special game stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game stop effect by referring to a table for effects stored in advance in the ROM 53. This special game stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special game has been stopped. In this embodiment, the special game stop effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution stop effect in the first embodiment.

In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected performance.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a special game stop effect command related to the special game stop effect determined in the special game stop effect determination process of step S2417K. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special game stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game stop effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the special game stop effect command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads out image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes the special game stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417K, or if it is determined in step S2416K that a special game stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2418I onwards, as in the first embodiment.

In this way, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 87K functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotation distribution means 87K that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 87K. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 87K is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

Here, in this embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit granting means that grants a benefit to a player based on the game balls distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 87K before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, after which the rotary distribution means 87K distributes the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85.
In this case, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and may be anything that can enter the game ball flowing down the game area. Also, the specific benefit providing means does not have to be the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and may provide information useful to the player, provide a situation that allows the game of the pachinko machine 1 to be advantageous, or provide anything that can provide a benefit to the player.

With this configuration, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary allocation means 87K, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 provide a profit to the player based on the game balls allocated to them by the rotary allocation means 87K, so that the player can enjoy the profit provided by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment, in addition to the same functions and advantages as those (1) to (5) and (9) in the first embodiment, the following functions and advantages can be achieved.
(19) The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotation distribution means 87K that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game hoping that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 87K. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(20) The open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary allocation means 87K, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 provide a profit to the player based on the game balls allocated to them by the rotary allocation means 87K. Therefore, the player can enjoy the profit provided by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Fourth Embodiment
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 2 is provided with the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the through gate 31I.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided with an operational winning device 26L, a variable winning device 27L, and a through gate 31L, as shown in Fig. 101. In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 2 is also different from the first embodiment in that it is provided with an equivalent winning port 88L provided at the lower left position of the variable winning through gate 85.

Figure 102 is an enlarged front view of the game board with the vicinity of the lower right game means enlarged. In Figure 102, the vertical direction is the Z axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z axis are the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The operational winning device 26L is provided adjacent to the left side of the variable winning device 27L. This operational winning device 26L includes an operational port 261L that opens upward to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the game ball, an opening/closing door 262L for opening and closing the operational port 261L, and an operational winning drive unit 263L for driving the opening/closing door 262L.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc., and guiding the game ball to the operating winning device 26L.

Here, the operating winning device 26L has the same configuration and function as the lower operating port 26 in the first embodiment, except for its shape and position.
Specifically, the actuation port 261L is provided in an opening formed in the play area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. This actuation port 261L is equipped with a detection sensor 303 and has the same function as the lower actuation port 26 in the first embodiment. When a ball enters the actuation port 261L, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of three prize balls. The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the upper actuation port 25 and the actuation port 261L may be different.

The opening and closing door 262L is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the operating port 261L. The opening and closing door 262L has the same function as the electric role 261 in the first embodiment.
Specifically, the opening/closing door 262L is connected to an actuation winning drive unit 263L mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This opening/closing door 262L is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the actuation winning drive unit 263L. The closed state is a state in which the opening of the actuation port 261L is closed by advancing toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2. The open state is a state in which the opening of the actuation port 261L is opened by retreating toward the inside of the game board 2 and sinking into the game board 2.

Therefore, when the opening and closing door 262L is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the operating opening 261L, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the operating opening 261L.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the actuation winning device 26L may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the actuation opening 261L (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state) and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the actuation opening 261L. Furthermore, the actuation winning device 26L may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the actuation opening 261L, rather than by setting the opening/closing door 262L, and in this case, the actuation winning device 26L may not be equipped with an opening/closing door 262L.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes that differ from each other in the frequency with which the opening and closing door 262L is set to the open state to allow game balls to enter the operating port 261L, as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the opening and closing door 262L is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the opening and closing door 262L is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role opening state is won, the opening door 262L is set to the open state more times and the opening time of each time the opening door 262L is set to the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time of the opening door 262L is set to the closed state between each opening in one electric role opening state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time secured as the waiting time between the end of the electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery (the duration of one variable display on the role display unit 35) is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the actuation port 261L than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player hits the ball to the left with a medium rotation amount of the launch handle 16, and the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area is shifted from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the upper actuation port 25 rather than the actuation port 261L. In the high frequency support mode, the player hits the ball to the right with a maximum rotation amount of the launch handle 16, and the ball's arrival position in the upper part of the play area is shifted from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the ball entering the actuation port 261L rather than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the operating port 261L, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many game balls.

In this way, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a left-hand hitting route (first path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper operating port 25 and makes it harder for game balls to enter the operating port 261L, and a right-hand hitting route (second path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the operating port 261L and makes it harder for game balls to enter the upper operating port 25.

The configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, multiple types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short securing time compared to the low-frequency support mode, and may be configured to shorten the average of the selected securing times. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency of setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode.

The variable winning device 27L has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27I in the first embodiment except for its size. Specifically, the variable winning device 27L has a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 for driving the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the game ball to the right by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum extent, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27L.

The through gate 31L has the same configuration as the through gate 31I in the first embodiment, except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31L has a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 103) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each of the through gates 31, 31L, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning holes.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball passes through an opening and is discharged from the game area, but also the manner in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area after passing through an opening without being discharged from the game area. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlets 28 and 281, the entry of game balls into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. In addition, the entry of game balls into the through gates 31 and 31L and the variable winning through gate 85 refers to the continued flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry of balls into the through gates 31 and 31L and the variable winning through gate 85 is also referred to as winning, just like the entry of balls into various winning ports.

The equivalent winning opening 88L is provided in the area to the left of the variable winning device 27L. This equivalent winning opening 88L is equipped with a detection sensor 310L (see FIG. 103) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 310L is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result of the detection sensor 310L. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of one prize ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. The detection sensor 310L may be any type that can detect the entry of game balls individually, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be adopted.

The game board 2 also has a group of nails NL5L planted on the left side of the equivalent winning opening 88L. The group of nails NL5L is planted so that all game balls that move to the left on the plate surface of the opening and closing door 272 enter the equivalent winning opening 88L.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 103, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, a sound and light emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 is also equipped with a payout control device 46 and a power supply and launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to make the payout device 48 described above pay out game balls. The power supply and launch control device 47 executes launch control to make the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above launch game balls.

The main control device 4 is equipped with a main control board 41 that is responsible for the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 which constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is an element which combines, on a chip, the ROM 43, the RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit acting as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to the multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, and 310L. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light emission control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the operation winning drive unit 263L that opens and closes the opening and closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27L, the open winning drive unit 843 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 842 of the open winning device 84, the main display unit 34, and the display unit for the gimmicks 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the operation winning drive unit 263L to open and close the operation port 261L. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open and close the large winning port 271. In addition, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning drive unit 843 to open and close the open winning port 841. In each game, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display unit 34 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each operation port 25, 261L. In addition, the MPU 42 executes display control of the role display unit 35 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 31, 31L.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and a power supply/launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, 310L are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the operating port 261L, the variable winning device 27L, the open winning device 84, and the equivalent winning port 88L, the out port 28, 281, each through gate 31, 31L, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, 310L, the MPU 42 performs winning judgment (ball winning judgment) for the various winning ports, the out port 28, 281, each through gate 31, 31L, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. The MPU 42 performs an internal lottery based on the winning judgment for the upper operating port 25 or the operating port 261L.

In this embodiment, the main control device 4 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the normal processing is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the normal processing in this embodiment are described below.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in Fig. 104. Note that, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the first embodiment in that it executes the process of step S306L instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306L, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process for controlling the drive of the opening/closing door 262L provided in the operation winning device 26L. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role opening lottery based on the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 443 of the RAM 44, and executes the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 262L if the electric role opening lottery is won. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the role display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric role opening lottery.

Figure 105 is a diagram showing the opening amount of the opening and closing door of the operating winning device. Specifically, Figure 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operating winning device 26L viewed from vertically above. Figure 105(A) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening and closing door 262L is set to a closed state, Figure 105(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening and closing door 262L is set to a fully open state, and Figure 105(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening and closing door 262L is set to a half-open state.

If the player does not win the lottery to open the electric device, the opening and closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is set to a closed state by being driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. 105 (A). If the opening and closing door 262L is set to a closed state, the game ball will pass over the opening and closing door 262L and will not be able to enter the operation opening 261L.

Here, in step S306L, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, it sets the opening amount when setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state to the fully open state. When the electric role opening lottery is won, the opening/closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is set to the fully open state by being driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. 105 (B). When the opening/closing door 262L is set to the fully open state, the game ball can enter the operation opening 261L.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines that the win/lose lottery mode is not the high probability mode (if the MPU 42 determines that the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode), it sets the opening amount when setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state to half open. When the electric role opening lottery is won, the opening/closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is set to a half-open open state by being driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. 105 (C). When the opening/closing door 262L is set to the half-open open state, the game ball passes over the opening/closing door 262L and is therefore unable to enter the operation opening 261L.

Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game, and the flow path in the Kruun guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out if a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the start port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the equivalent winning port 88L functions as a tertiary winning area that, when a ball enters the equivalent winning port 88L, gives the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of paying out one prize ball, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this tertiary winning area.
The rotational distribution means 82 has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state (normal guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path in the crane induction state or the flow path in the start port induction state, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path in the normal induction state, and is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the equivalent winning port 88L is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters the winning port.

With this configuration, the equivalent winning port 88L can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters, so that the player fires game balls at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a specific guidance state, and does not fire game balls at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L pays out one prize ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. In contrast, the tertiary winning area may, for example, hold a lottery to determine whether or not to pay out prize balls when a game ball enters the area, and pay out one prize ball if the lottery is won. The tertiary winning area may, for example, have a winning opening that pays out one prize ball and an outlet that does not pay out prize balls side by side, and a switch that switches between allowing the game ball to enter one of these openings. In short, it is sufficient for the tertiary winning area to be able to award one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area.

In this embodiment, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning port 88L in a specified game state (when the win/lose lottery mode is determined to be the low probability mode).

According to this configuration, in a specified game state, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning port 88L, so that in a specified game state, the player will not fire game balls aiming at the flow path in the normal guidance state when the rotation distribution means 82 is in the normal guidance state. Therefore, in a specified game state (normal game state), the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is fired toward the right-hitting route.

According to the present embodiment, in addition to the same functions and advantages as those (1) to (14) in the first embodiment, the following functions and advantages can be achieved.
(21) Since the equivalent winning opening 88L can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters, the player fires game balls at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a specific guidance state, and does not fire game balls at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(22) In a predetermined game state, the flow path in the normal guiding state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning port 88L, so that in a predetermined game state, the player will not shoot game balls aiming at the flow path in the normal guiding state when the rotation distribution means 82 is in the normal guiding state. Therefore, in a predetermined game state, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the player shoots a game ball toward the right-hitting route.

[Inventions extracted from each embodiment and each reference form]
The following describes the features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and reference forms. Note that, among the features of the invention group, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and reference forms are shown in parentheses, but the features of the invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments and reference forms, and modifications, improvements, etc., within the scope of achieving the purpose of the features of the invention group, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the invention group.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (preview performance) for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance during the predetermined period in overlap with the first performance based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The first effect means continues executing the first effect after the second effect is completed.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. According to this, the gaming machine can execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature A1 of the present invention,
The first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended to execute the second presentation, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature A1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to feature A3 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so that the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry portion is provided,
The performance execution means includes:
The first performance means stores data related to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying a plurality of layers including a first performance layer and a second performance layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second performance layer in which data relating to a second performance based on the game ball entering the second start entry section is stored by the second performance means on a first performance layer in which data relating to a first performance based on the game ball entering the first start entry section is stored by the first performance means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer, so that even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry section can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means includes:
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reserved areas (a first sub-side reserved area SRa and a second sub-side reserved area SRb) for storing reserved information of a reserved state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the entrance of a game ball into the first starting ball entrance portion;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the entrance of the game ball into the second start ball entrance part;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even if a first performance based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on the game ball entering the first start entry section, a second performance based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on the game ball entering the second start entry section.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation is a pre-reading presentation that, when the first reserve storage means stores reserve information in the first reserve area, notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserve information by utilizing a presentation based on the reserve information stored in the first reserve area that is consumed before the reserve information.

According to feature A6 of the present invention, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if the second effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area in a state in which the first effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, even in a state in which the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, the gaming machine can execute the second effect, and can continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the reserved image to be displayed on the variable display means by storing data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer having a higher priority than the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved image by storing data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, wherein the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation in a fade-out manner.

According to feature A9 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine according to the feature A9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature A10 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation by the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be ended and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is configured to cause the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature A11 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once, so that the second presentation can be ended quickly.

Feature A of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting the varying display of pictures, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can result in players being unable to enjoy the game comfortably.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A specific performance means (pre-notification hold performance decision process and special hold performance decision process) for causing the variable display means to execute a specific performance (pre-reading performance and performance for consuming special reserve) by storing data related to the specific performance layer (second layer L2 and third layer L3) based on the establishment of a specific opportunity;
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying the common image on the variable display means by storing data relating to a common image different from the specific performance in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the specific performance layer;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising an image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the specific performance layer in order of priority.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the common image on the variable display means by storing data relating to a common image different from the specific performance in a common layer that has a higher priority than the specific performance layer, so that when a specific performance is executed, the common image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the common image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature B1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having an information notification means that displays a reserved picture associated with the reserved information as the common image on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved image by storing data relating to the reserved image in a common layer that has a higher priority than the specific performance layer, so that when a specific performance is executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The specific performance means is
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) as the specific performance for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity as the specific opportunity;
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) as the specific performance different from the first performance during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity as the specific opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The first presentation means continues executing the first presentation after the second presentation is completed.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation in overlap with the first presentation during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. According to this, the gaming machine can execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the present invention,
The first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended to execute the second presentation, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to feature B5 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so that the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry portion is provided,
The specific performance means is
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) as the specific performance layer when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) as the specific performance layer having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section as the second trigger;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying a plurality of layers including a first performance layer and a second performance layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second performance layer in which data relating to a second performance based on the game ball entering the second start entry section is stored by the second performance means on a first performance layer in which data relating to a first performance based on the game ball entering the first start entry section is stored by the first performance means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer, so that even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry section can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means includes:
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reserved areas (a first sub-side reserved area SRa and a second sub-side reserved area SRb) for storing reserved information of a reserved state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the entrance of a game ball into the first starting ball entrance section;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the entrance of the game ball into the second start ball entrance part;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even if a first performance based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on the game ball entering the first start entry section, a second performance based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on the game ball entering the second start entry section.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in feature B7 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation is a pre-reading presentation that, when the first reserve storage means stores reserve information in the first reserve area, notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserve information by utilizing a presentation based on the reserve information stored in the first reserve area that is consumed before the reserve information.

According to feature B8 of the present invention, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if the second effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area in a state in which the first effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in a state in which the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, wherein the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation in a fade-out manner.

According to feature B9 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine according to the feature B9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation in the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be ended and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B8 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is configured to cause the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature B11 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once, so that the second presentation can be ended quickly.

Feature B of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such a gaming machine stores reserved information in an information storage means in the order in which gaming balls enter the operating port, and displays a common image such as a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the basis of the reserved information stored in the information storage means. After starting the variable display of the patterns, the gaming machine also executes a number of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, because the multiple types of effects are executed in a disorderly manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, they can affect the common image displayed on the variable display means, which can cause problems in that the player cannot enjoy playing the game comfortably.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for allowing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (preview performance) for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance during the predetermined period in overlap with the first performance based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine, wherein the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation in a fade-out manner.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation, overlapping with the first presentation, during a predetermined period of time, based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger. The second presentation means then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading it out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature C1 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature C2 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation by the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be ended and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature C3.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (preview performance) for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance during the predetermined period in overlap with the first performance based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The second presentation means is configured to cause the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature C3 of the present invention, the second performance means causes the variable display means to execute a second performance different from the first performance in a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger. The second performance means then causes the variable display means to immediately end the second performance all at once, so that the second performance can be ended quickly.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3 of the present invention,
The first presentation means continues executing the first presentation after the second presentation is completed.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. With this, the gaming machine can execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention,
The first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended to execute the second presentation, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to feature C6 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so that the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry portion is provided,
The performance execution means includes:
The first performance means stores data related to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying a plurality of layers including a first performance layer and a second performance layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second performance layer in which data relating to a second performance based on the game ball entering the second start entry section is stored by the second performance means on a first performance layer in which data relating to a first performance based on the game ball entering the first start entry section is stored by the first performance means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer, so that even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry section can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine according to feature C7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means includes:
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reserved areas (a first sub-side reserved area SRa and a second sub-side reserved area SRb) for storing reserved information of a reserved state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the entrance of a game ball into the first starting ball entrance portion;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the entrance of the game ball into the second start ball entrance part;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even if a first performance based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on the game ball entering the first start entry section, a second performance based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on the game ball entering the second start entry section.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation is a pre-reading presentation that, when the first reserve storage means stores reserve information in the first reserve area, notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserve information by utilizing a presentation based on the reserve information stored in the first reserve area that is consumed before the reserve information.

According to feature C9 of the present invention, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if the second effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area in a state in which the first effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in a state in which the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature C10 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the reserved image to be displayed on the variable display means by storing data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer having a higher priority than the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.

According to feature C11 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved image by storing data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature C of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting the varying display of pictures, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can result in players being unable to enjoy the game comfortably.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (preview performance) for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance during the predetermined period in overlap with the first performance based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation is more useful to a player than the first presentation.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation, overlapping with the first presentation, during a specified period of time, based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger. Since the second presentation is more useful to the player than the first presentation, the player will pay attention to whether or not the second presentation is executed during the specified period of time. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention,
The first effect means continues executing the first effect after the second effect is completed.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the present invention,
The first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended to execute the second presentation, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to feature D4 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so that the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D4 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry portion is provided,
The performance execution means includes:
The first performance means stores data related to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying a plurality of layers including a first performance layer and a second performance layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second performance layer in which data relating to a second performance based on the game ball entering the second start entry section is stored by the second performance means on a first performance layer in which data relating to a first performance based on the game ball entering the first start entry section is stored by the first performance means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer, so that even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry section can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means includes:
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reserved areas (a first sub-side reserved area SRa and a second sub-side reserved area SRb) for storing reserved information of a reserved state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the entrance of a game ball into the first starting ball entrance section;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the entrance of the game ball into the second start ball entrance part;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even if a first performance based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on the game ball entering the first start entry section, a second performance based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on the game ball entering the second start entry section.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation is a pre-reading presentation that, when the first reserve storage means stores reserve information in the first reserve area, notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserve information by utilizing a presentation based on the reserve information stored in the first reserve area that is consumed before the reserve information.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if the second effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area in a state in which the first effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, even in a state in which the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, the gaming machine can execute the second effect, and can continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the reserved image to be displayed on the variable display means by storing data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer having a higher priority than the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved image by storing data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, wherein the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation in a fade-out manner.

According to feature D10 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature D11.
In the gaming machine described in feature D10 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature D11 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation by the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be ended and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature D12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is configured to cause the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature D12 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once, so that the second presentation can be ended quickly.

According to group D of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting the varying display of pictures, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, because multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem that players' attention to the game is reduced.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launch handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) for allowing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and performance execution means (audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) having a plurality of expectancies over a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity,
The gaming machine includes:
A second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for executing a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance in overlap with the first performance during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The first presentation means changes the expectation level of the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the second presentation means executes a second presentation different from the first presentation in an overlapping period with the first presentation based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and the first presentation means changes the expectation level of the first presentation during the overlapping period during which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation. According to this, the gaming machine can execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can change the expectation level of the first presentation during the overlapping period during which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
The second performance means (special hold performance determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second performance (performance for consuming special reserve) different from the first performance during the predetermined period in overlap with the first performance based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The first presentation means continues executing the first presentation after the second presentation is completed.

According to feature E2 of the present invention group, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. With this, the gaming machine can execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation ends. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E2 of the present invention,
The first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended to execute the second presentation, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to feature E4 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlapping period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so that the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
A first starting ball entry portion (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry portion is provided,
The performance execution means includes:
The first performance means stores data related to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry section as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry section as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying a plurality of layers including a first performance layer and a second performance layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second performance layer in which data relating to a second performance based on the game ball entering the second start entry section is stored by the second performance means on a first performance layer in which data relating to a first performance based on the game ball entering the first start entry section is stored by the first performance means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer, so that even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry section is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry section can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E5 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means includes:
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of the variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reserved areas (a first sub-side reserved area SRa and a second sub-side reserved area SRb) for storing reserved information of a reserved state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the entrance of a game ball into the first starting ball entrance section;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the entrance of the game ball into the second start ball entrance part;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even if a first performance based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on the game ball entering the first start entry section, a second performance based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on the game ball entering the second start entry section.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation is a pre-reading presentation that, when the first reserve storage means stores reserve information in the first reserve area, notifies the player of the expected degree of the reserve information by utilizing a presentation based on the reserve information stored in the first reserve area that is consumed before the reserve information.

According to feature E7 of the present invention, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if the second effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area in a state in which the first effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry area, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, even in a state in which the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, the gaming machine can execute the second effect, and can continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E6 or E7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the reserved image to be displayed on the variable display means by storing data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer having a higher priority than the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine according to the feature E6 or E7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means includes:
An information notification means (reservation occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing data relating to the reserved pattern in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved image by storing data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, wherein the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation in a fade-out manner.

According to feature E10 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature E11.
In the gaming machine according to feature E10 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to feature E11 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation by the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be ended and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature E12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means is configured to cause the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature E12 of the present invention group, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once, so that the second presentation can be ended quickly.

According to group E of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting the varying display of the images, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can result in players being unable to enjoy the game comfortably.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) having a rolling surface for rolling the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area and for causing the gaming balls to temporarily roll and fall on the rolling surface; and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) for allowing the gaming balls that have fallen from the stage to enter the game machine;
The stage comprises:
A guide means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding a game ball to a rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a blocking means (second plate 783) that, when the guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage, prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage.

According to feature F1 of the present invention group, when the guiding means has guided at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the stage, so that the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the stage without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention,
The stage comprises:
A first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F),
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage,
The guiding means guides the game ball to a rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the first stage,
The blocking means guides a game ball onto the rolling surface (rolling surface 76) of the second stage, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball onto the rolling surface of the first stage.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the second stage, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface of the second stage even if the blocking means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the first stage.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to a player than the second stage.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the second stage, the player can safely enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3 of the present invention,
The blocking means is
a blocking state in which the guiding means blocks the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
a non-blocking state in which the guiding means does not block the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
The stage comprises:
A switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) is provided for switching the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state,
The switching means switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage.

According to feature F4 of the present invention group, the stage is equipped with a switching means for switching the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state, and the switching means switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention,
The switching means is
a contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guide means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the switching means includes contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it will contact some of the subsequent gaming balls different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means will contact the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) is provided for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guide means,
The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage with peace of mind.

According to group F of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also includes a stage for temporarily rolling and dropping the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means enables the gaming ball that has fallen from this stage to enter the game slot.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, creating the problem that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) having a rolling surface for rolling the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area and for causing the gaming balls to temporarily roll and fall on the rolling surface; and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) for allowing the gaming balls that have fallen from the stage to enter the game machine;
The stage comprises:
A first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F),
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage;
The game machine has a first induction state in which the game ball is guided only to the first stage, and a second induction state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage, and is provided with a stage induction means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to either the first stage or the second stage;
The stage guiding means is
A gaming machine comprising a switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the stage guidance means to either a first guidance state or a second guidance state.

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the stage guiding means includes a switching means for switching the stage guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state, and the switching means switches to either the first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first stage, or the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the stage guiding means. In addition, by switching to the second guiding state (first guiding state), the switching means prevents the stage guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage), so that the game ball guided to the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage) without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to a second guiding state when the stage guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, when at least one game ball has been guided to the rolling surface of the first stage by the stage guidance means, the switching means switches the stage guidance means to the second guidance state, so that the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to a player than the second stage.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, a game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the second stage, the player can safely enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature G2 or Feature G3 of the present invention,
The switching means cooperates with a game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means to switch the stage guidance means to a first guidance state.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the switching means cooperates with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means to switch the stage guidance means to the first guidance state, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature G2 or Feature G3 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball induced to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the stage guidance means to the first guidance state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention,
The switching means is
a contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the switching means includes contact means for switching the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention,
The switching means is
a contact means (fourth plate 789G) for switching the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the first stage by the guidance means.

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

According to group G of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also includes a stage for temporarily rolling and dropping the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means enables the gaming ball that has fallen from this stage to enter the game slot.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, creating the problem that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board, and a flow path (two-stage stage 7, 7E) for allowing the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to flow in,
The flow path is
A first flow path (upper stage 71, 71E);
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
The ball guide device has a first guide state in which the ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guide state in which the ball is guided only to the second flow path, and is provided with a flow path guide means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) for guiding the ball to either the first flow path or the second flow path;
The flow path guide means is
A switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73H) is provided for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state,
The switching means switches to a first guiding state by cooperating with a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first flow path, or a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second flow path, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. In addition, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the first flow path, so that the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Furthermore, the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature H1 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one gaming ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, when at least one gaming ball has been guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means, the switching means switches the flow path guide means to the second guidance state, so that the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature H2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous to a player than the second flow path.

According to feature H3 of the present invention group, a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls, and since the first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

According to group H of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also has a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the initial ball entry means enables the gaming ball that has fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, when a subsequent gaming ball comes into contact with a gaming ball rolling on a flow path such as a stage, the gaming ball rolling on the stage may move in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, creating the problem that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to play comfortably.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board, and a flow path (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) for introducing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area,
The flow path is
A first flow path (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F),
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
The ball guide device has a first guide state in which the ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guide state in which the ball is guided only to the second flow path, and is provided with a flow path guide means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) for guiding the ball to either the first flow path or the second flow path;
The flow path guide means is
A switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) is provided for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state,
The switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to feature I1 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first flow path, or a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second flow path, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. In addition, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the first flow path, so that the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Furthermore, the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature I1 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one gaming ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, when at least one gaming ball has been guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means, the switching means switches the flow path guide means to the second guidance state, so that the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature I2 of the present invention,
The switching means is
A contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) is provided for switching the flow path guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the subsequent gaming balls other than the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to feature I3 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine according to the feature I2 of the present invention,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) is provided for switching the flow path guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means,
The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent gaming balls other than the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to feature I4 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous to a player than the second flow path.

According to feature I5 of the present invention group, a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls, and since the first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

According to group I of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also has a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the initial ball entry means enables the gaming ball that has fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, when a subsequent gaming ball comes into contact with a gaming ball rolling on a flow path such as a stage, the gaming ball rolling on the stage may move in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, creating the problem that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to play comfortably.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
A first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is created;
A guide means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a benefit to the player;
A second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) that generates the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (a second plate-shaped portion 786 or a fourth plate 789G) for generating the first game state when a second game ball, which is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state, satisfies a specific condition;
and a limiting means (second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the first entry area, and the guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the first entry area to the second entry area that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the restricting means restricts the second game state generation means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 of the present invention,
The restricting means is configured to cause the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area different from a predetermined area while the second game state is occurring.

According to feature J2 of the present invention group, the restricting means causes the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area that is different from the predetermined area while the second game state is occurring, so that the second game state generating means can reliably restrict the generation of the second game state.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on a first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a specified area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to feature J3 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state if the state generating lottery is won, and does not generate the second game state if the state generating lottery is not won, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J3 of the present invention,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-restricted state.

According to feature J4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to a limited state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, and switches to a non-limited state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means, so that it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the second game state is occurring, without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the first game state is occurring.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature J5 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player focuses on whether the second game ball satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J5 of the present invention,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) for causing the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to feature J6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, so that the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope of entering the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to feature J7 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the second game state generating means can be simplified.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J7 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to feature J8 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so that the configuration of the first game state generating means can be simplified.

According to group J of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that awards a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without any benefit being awarded during the second game state, the gaming machine will no longer be able to allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
A first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is created;
A guide means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a benefit to the player;
A second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) that generates the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (a second plate-shaped portion 786 or a fourth plate 789G) for generating the first game state when a second game ball, which is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state, satisfies a specific condition;
A gaming machine characterized by having a game ball guiding means (second plate 783) that guides the second game ball to another area different from a specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring.

According to feature K1 of the present invention group, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the game ball guide means guides the game ball launched by the launch means while the second game state is occurring to another area in the game area that is different from the specified area, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the second game ball passing through another area in the game area that is different from a predetermined area while the second game state is occurring.

According to feature K2 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the second game ball passing through another area in the game area other than the predetermined area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first game state can be generated using the second game ball.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on a first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a specified area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to feature K3 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state if the state generating lottery is won, and does not generate the second game state if the state generating lottery is not won, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3 of the present invention,
The game ball guiding means is
A game ball guide state in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state;
a game ball non-guiding state in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the gaming ball guiding state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the gaming ball non-guiding state.

According to feature K4 of the present invention group, the game ball guiding means switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means, so that it is possible to reliably restrict the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means while the first game state is occurring.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature K5 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player focuses on whether the second game ball satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5 of the present invention,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) for causing the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to feature K6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a first probability state that causes the second gaming state to be generated in the second gaming state generating means based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second gaming state to be generated in the second gaming state generating means based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, so that the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope of the second probability state being reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to feature K7 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the second game state generating means can be simplified.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to feature K8 of the present invention, the first game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so that the configuration of the first game state generating means can be simplified.

According to group K of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that awards a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without any benefit being awarded during the second game state, the gaming machine will no longer be able to allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
A first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is created;
A guide means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a player with a benefit;
A second game state generating means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) that generates the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for generating the first game state when a second game ball, which is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state, satisfies a specific condition;
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) for causing the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to feature L1 of the present invention, during the occurrence of the second game state, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area that provides a benefit to the player, so that the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the first game state has a first probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, so that the player pays attention to the probability state of the second game state generating means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a restriction means for restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to feature L2 of the present invention group, the limiting means limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L2 of the present invention,
The restricting means is configured to cause the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area different from a predetermined area while the second game state is occurring.

According to feature L3 of the present invention group, the restriction means causes the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area that is different from the predetermined area while the second game state is occurring, so that the second game state generation means can reliably restrict the generation of the second game state.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-restricted state.

According to feature L4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to a limited state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, and switches to a non-limited state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means, so that it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the second game state is occurring, without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the first game state is occurring.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L4 of the present invention,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on a first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a specified area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to feature L5 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state if the state generating lottery is won, and does not generate the second game state if the state generating lottery is not won, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature L6 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player focuses on whether the second game ball satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to feature L7 of the present invention, the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the configuration of the second game state generating means can be simplified.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L7 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to feature L8 of the present invention, the first game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so that the configuration of the first game state generating means can be simplified.

According to group L of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that awards a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without any benefit being awarded during the second game state, the gaming machine will no longer be able to allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
A first gaming state;
a second gaming state different from the first gaming state;
a second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) for generating the second game state based on a first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area and coming into contact with and displacing the first game ball during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) that generates the first game state based on a second game ball that is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area and coming into contact with and being displaced by the second game ball;
and a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game state generating means guides the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit awarding area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) that awards a first benefit to the player, and the first game state generating means guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit awarding area (lower stage 72) that awards the player a second benefit different from the first benefit.

According to feature M1 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means guides the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area that grants the player a first benefit, and the first game state generating means guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area that grants the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so that the player will pay attention to the destination of the game ball. In addition, the limiting means limits the second game state generating means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature M2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature M1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first game ball guided to the first benefit-granting area by the second game state generating means enters a first benefit entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants the first benefit when a first condition is satisfied, and the second game ball guided to the second benefit-granting area by the first game state generating means enters a second benefit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants the second benefit when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to feature M2 of the present invention group, a first game ball guided to a first benefit-granting area by the second game state generating means will enter a first benefit-granting ball entry area that will grant a first benefit if a first condition is satisfied, and a second game ball guided to a second benefit-granting area by the first game state generating means will enter a second benefit-granting ball entry area that will grant a second benefit if a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the first and second conditions are satisfied.

Feature M3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature M2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming ball that does not satisfy the first condition, and the second gaming ball that does not satisfy the second condition, are discharged into another area different from both the first profitable ball entry area and the second profitable ball entry area.

According to feature M3 of the present invention group, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into another area different from both the first profitable ball entry area and the second profitable ball entry area, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged into another area.

Feature M4.
In the gaming machine described in the features M1 to M3 of the present invention,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-restricted state.

According to feature M4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to a limited state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, and switches to a non-limited state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means, so that it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the second game state is occurring, without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means while the first game state is occurring.

Feature M5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4 of the present invention,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) for causing the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to feature M5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state has a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability, so that the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope of entering the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

With group M of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that awards a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without any benefit being awarded during the second game state, the gaming machine will no longer be able to allow the player to play comfortably.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and operating port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives a first benefit to a player;
A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that gives the player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit;
a third flow path that allows the game ball to enter a third ball entry area (equivalent winning hole 88L) that gives the player a third benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that has an operating state in which game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows a gaming ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified gaming state.

According to feature N1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state in which the gaming ball can flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state in which the gaming ball can flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state, the player will not shoot the game ball aiming at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state in the predetermined game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in the predetermined game state.

Feature N2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature N1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different faces forming the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature N2 of the present invention group, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board, so the gaming machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively use the limited space of the game board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature N3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delaying the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the secondary benefit.

According to feature N3 of the present invention group, if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to enter the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature N4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature N3 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit providing means for providing a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature N4 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature N5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to feature N5 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area, so that the player fires game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an operating state, and does not fire game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature N6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5 of the present invention,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than a proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path.

According to feature N6 of the present invention group, when the operating member is in an operating state, it causes the gaming ball to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the primary flow path, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the gaming ball flows into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using group N of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives a first benefit to a player;
a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet port 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that gives the player a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the first benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state in which game balls can flow down the first flow path and an inoperative state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inoperative state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature O1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down the primary flow path and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the first flow path and the third flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-back direction of the game board, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Even if two flow paths, the first flow path and the third flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the game machine can efficiently form the flow paths by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature O2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature O1 of the present invention,
The game board is
a secondary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that gives a player a secondary benefit that is smaller than the first benefit and larger than the third benefit;
the operating member has an operating state in which the game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different faces forming the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature O2 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state in which the gaming ball can flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state in which the gaming ball can flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-back direction of the game board, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, the first flow path and the third flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the game machine can effectively use the limited space of the game board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature O3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature O2 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delaying the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the secondary benefit.

According to feature O3 of the present invention group, if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to enter the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature O4.
In the gaming machine according to the feature O2 of the present invention,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than a proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path.

According to feature O4 of the present invention group, when the operating member is in an operating state, it causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game balls are flowing into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature O5.
In the gaming machine according to the feature O2 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit providing means for providing a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature O5 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature O6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O5 of the present invention,
The tertiary flow path is characterized in that, in a specified gaming state, the gaming ball can only enter the tertiary ball entry area.

According to feature O6 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that the player will not shoot the game ball aiming at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state in the specified game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in the specified game state.

Feature O7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to feature O7 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area, so that the player fires game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an operating state, and does not fire game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to group O of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives a first benefit to a player;
A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that gives the player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit;
a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet port 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that gives the player a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state in which game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delaying the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the secondary benefit.

According to feature P1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state in which gaming balls can flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state in which gaming balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, so that the player can immediately enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to enter the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature P2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature P1 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit providing means for providing a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature P2 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature P3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The tertiary flow path is characterized in that, in a specified gaming state, the gaming ball can only enter the tertiary ball entry area.

According to feature P3 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that the player will not shoot the game ball aiming at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state in the specified game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in the specified game state.

Feature P4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P3 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different faces forming the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature P4 of the present invention group, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board, so the gaming machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively use the limited space of the game board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature P5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to feature P5 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area, so that the player fires game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an operating state, and does not fire game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature P6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P5 of the present invention,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than a proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path.

According to feature P6 of the present invention group, when the operating member is in an operating state, it causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game balls are flowing into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using group P of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Feature Q group>
Feature Q1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and operating port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives a first benefit to a player;
A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that gives the player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit;
a third flow path that allows the game ball to enter a third ball entry area (equivalent winning hole 88L) that gives the player a third benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that has an operating state in which game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to feature Q1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area, the player shoots game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an operating state, and does not shoot game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature Q2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature Q1 of the present invention,
The tertiary flow path is characterized in that, in a specified gaming state, the gaming ball can only enter the tertiary ball entry area.

According to feature Q2 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that the player will not shoot the game ball aiming at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state in the specified game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in the specified game state.

Feature Q3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different faces forming the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature Q3 of the present invention group, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board, so the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Also, even if three flow paths, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the game machine can effectively use the limited space of the game board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature Q4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q3 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delaying the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the secondary benefit.

According to feature Q4 of the present invention group, if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to enter the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature Q5.
In the gaming machine described in feature Q4 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit providing means for providing a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature Q5 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature Q6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q5 of the present invention,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than a proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path.

According to feature Q6 of the present invention group, when the operating member is in an operating state, it causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game balls are flowing into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using group Q of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives a first benefit to a player;
A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that gives the player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit;
a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet port 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that gives the player a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state in which game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The operating member, in the operating state, causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than a proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path.

According to feature R1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Moreover, in the actuating state, the actuating member causes the game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of game balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the primary flow path, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the game balls flow into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature R2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature R1 of the present invention,
The tertiary flow path is characterized in that, in a specified gaming state, the gaming ball can only enter the tertiary ball entry area.

According to feature R2 of the present invention group, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that the player will not shoot the game ball aiming at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state in the specified game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in the specified game state.

Feature R3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different faces forming the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to feature R3 of the present invention group, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board, so the gaming machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively use the limited space of the game board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature R4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delaying the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
This gaming machine is characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the secondary benefit.

According to feature R4 of the present invention group, if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area before the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit, so that the player can instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to enter the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature R5.
In the gaming machine described in feature R4 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit providing means for providing a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature R5 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature R6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to feature R6 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters the area, so that the player fires game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an operating state, and does not fire game balls at the operating member when the operating member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using group R of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristics Group S>
Feature S1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) which executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts game in the specific control state.

According to feature S1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S1 of the present invention,
The special game execution means includes:
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
and a ball entry delay means (Krun 81) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature S2 of the present invention group, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time before starting game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature S3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature S2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game ball;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature S3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S4.
In the gaming machine according to the feature S3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) which switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to feature S4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means which switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and which switches the game ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to feature S5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features S2 to S5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature S6 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts gameplay in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

Feature S7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features S2 to S6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to feature S7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means for distributing gaming balls flowing down a special gaming path to either a special gaming payout means or a ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming balls to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S8.
In the gaming machine according to the feature S7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution possible state (specific induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) which switches the special allocation means to the allocation possible state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation impossible state when the special game is not being executed.

According to feature S8 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S9.
In the gaming machine according to the feature S8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path by passing the game balls through the front surface of the game board, and, in the distribution impossible state, distributes the game balls so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing the game balls through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature S9 of the present invention group, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

By using group S of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, the game state transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, which creates a problem in that the game flow becomes monotonous and the player loses interest in the game.

<Feature T group>
Feature T1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A first route (left-handed route) leading to the starting ball entry means;
A second route (right-hitting route) leading to the special game payout means and different from the first route is provided,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) that pays out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game ball;
and a launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of the game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature T1 of the present invention group, the launch suppression means switches the state of the special game payout means to suppress the launch of the game ball toward the second path, so that the player will not launch the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature T2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T1 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The launch suppression means is provided with a regulated state switching means (winning process for an open winning) for switching the game ball payout means to either the unregulated state or the regulated state.

According to feature T2 of the present invention group, the launch suppression means includes a regulated state switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either a non-regulated state or a regulated state, so that when the regulated state switching means switches the game ball payout means to a regulated state, the player will not launch the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T1 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the launch suppression means includes a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period.

According to feature T3 of the present invention group, the launch suppression means includes a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period, so that when the ball entry waiting period switching means switches to the second ball entry waiting period, the player will not launch the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T3 of the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state,
The special game execution means is provided with the special game payout means.

According to feature T4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T5.
In the gaming machine described in feature T4 of the present invention,
The special game execution means includes:
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) is provided for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with the second path (right-hit route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature T5 of the present invention group, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until the specific control start means starts game play in the specific control state can be delayed, allowing the player to enjoy a special game that is different from game play in the specific control state.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the second path, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature T6.
In the gaming machine described in feature T5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature T6 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts gameplay in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

Feature T7.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special distribution means (a rotation distribution means 82, a moving distribution means 86J, or a rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes game balls flowing down the second path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to feature T7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means for distributing gaming balls flowing down the second path to either the special gaming payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming balls to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution possible state (specific induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the second path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a non-allocation state (normal induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the second path is not allocated to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) which switches the special allocation means to the allocation possible state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation impossible state when the special game is not being executed.

According to feature T8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with an allocation state switching means that switches the special allocation means to an allocation-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special allocation means to an allocation-disabled state when a special game is not being played, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the allocation state switching means will switch the special allocation means to an allocation-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T9.
In the gaming machine described in feature T8 of the present invention,
The special distribution means, in the distribution-enabled state, distributes game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front surface of the game board, and, in the distribution-disabled state, distributes game balls flowing down the second path so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature T9 of the present invention group, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

According to group T of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably, and therefore solves the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such a gaming machine has a first path (left-hand hit route) and a second path (right-hand hit route) different from the first path, and a player shoots a gaming ball toward either the first path or the second path.

However, if either the first path or the second path is determined to be advantageous to the player, the player will shoot the game ball toward the path that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game status of the gaming machine, which will result in the problem that the player will not be able to play comfortably.

<Characteristic U group>
Feature U1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
A ball entry delay means (Krun 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
a periodic benefit providing means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for providing a benefit to a player according to the length of a period from when the game state is transitioned to the specific control state by the game state transition means until when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a special gaming path (right-hand hitting route) leading to both the periodic profit providing means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the gaming state is transitioned to a specific control state by the gaming state transition means, the time until game play in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means can be delayed.
The periodic profit granting means can grant a profit to the player according to the length of the period from when the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state until when the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature U2 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means, so that after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts gameplay in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

Feature U3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U1 or feature U2 of the present invention group,
a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state;
The special game execution means includes:
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) as the period profit granting means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A gaming machine comprising the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U3 of the present invention group, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time before starting game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature U4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U3 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game ball;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature U4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) which switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to feature U5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means which switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and which switches the game ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to feature U6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features U3 to U6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means for distributing gaming balls flowing down a special gaming path to either a special gaming payout means or a ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming balls to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution possible state (specific induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) which switches the special allocation means to the allocation possible state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation impossible state when the special game is not being executed.

According to feature U8 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path by passing the game balls through the front surface of the game board, and, in the distribution impossible state, distributes the game balls so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing the game balls through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature U9 of the present invention group, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

By using group U of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, the game state transitions to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, which creates a problem in that the game flow becomes monotonous and the player loses interest in the game.

<Feature V Group>
Feature V1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter;
A specific benefit providing means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for providing a benefit to a player;
A special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) is provided for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The specific advantage granting means grants an advantage to a player based on the game balls allocated to the specific advantage granting means by the special allocation means before the game balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature V1 of the present invention group, the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls that have been allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, so that the player can enjoy the benefit granted by the specific benefit granting means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V2.
In the gaming machine according to the feature V1 of the present invention,
The specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state,
The special game execution means includes:
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) as the specific profit providing means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
and a ball entry delay means (Krun 81) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature V2 of the present invention group, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time before starting game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature V3.
In the gaming machine according to the feature V2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
and a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature V3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V4.
In the gaming machine according to the feature V3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) which switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to feature V4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V5.
In the gaming machine according to the feature V3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means which switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and which switches the game ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to feature V5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features V2 to V5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature V6 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts playing in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

Feature V7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features V2 to V6 of the present invention,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution possible state (specific induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) which switches the special allocation means to the allocation possible state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation impossible state when the special game is not being executed.

According to feature V7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V8.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path by passing the game balls through the front surface of the game board, and, in the distribution impossible state, distributes the game balls so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing the game balls through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature V8 of the present invention group, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

By using group V of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures in a static state and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.

However, when a player wins a jackpot, the gaming machine transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable winning device to a state in which gaming balls can enter the machine, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This causes the process of awarding benefits to the player to become monotonous, resulting in a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82) is provided for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either a first distribution flow path or a second distribution flow path,
The special distribution means distributes game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature W1 of the present invention, the special distribution means distributes game balls to a first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to a second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

Feature W2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W1 of the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state,
The special game execution means includes:
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
and a ball entry delay means (Krun 81) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine is provided with a special game path (right-hitting route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
The special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means via the first distribution flow path.

According to feature W2 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
The special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time before starting game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature W3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
and a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature W3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) which switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to feature W4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire gaming balls aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means which switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and which switches the game ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to feature W5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features W2 to W5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature W6 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts gameplay in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

Feature W7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features W2 to W6 of the present invention,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution possible state (specific induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal induction state) in which the game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) which switches the special allocation means to the allocation possible state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation impossible state when the special game is not being executed.

According to feature W7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with an allocation state switching means that switches the special allocation means to an allocation-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special allocation means to an allocation-disabled state when a special game is not being played, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the allocation state switching means will switch the special allocation means to an allocation-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using group W of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines have various components (gimmicks) in the gaming area, such as numerous nails planted in the gaming area to appropriately disperse the directions in which gaming balls fall, as well as windmills and other such components.

However, because gaming machines distribute game balls by passing them over the surface of a gaming board, the flow can become monotonous, which can lead to a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristics Group X>
Feature X1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) is provided for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either a first distribution flow path or a second distribution flow path,
The special allocation means includes:
A distribution-enabled state (specific induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path;
A distribution-disabled state (normal induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising an allocation state switching means (special game execution process) for switching the special allocation means to either the allocation possible state or the allocation impossible state.

According to feature X1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching the special distribution means to either a distribution-enabled state or a distribution-disabled state, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X1 of the present invention,
The special distribution means distributes game balls to either the first distribution path or the second distribution path by passing the game balls through the front surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to another path different from the first distribution path and the second distribution path by passing the game balls through the back surface of the game board.

According to feature X2 of the present invention group, the gaming ball is distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path by passing through the front surface of the gaming board, and is distributed to a flow path other than the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path by passing through the back surface of the gaming board, so that the gaming machine can diversify the flow of gaming balls.

Feature X3.
In the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A special control starting means (special game execution process) for starting a game in the special control state when a ball enters the special ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the special control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state,
The special game execution means includes:
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
and a ball entry delay means (Krun 81) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine includes a special game path (right-hitting route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
The special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to the special game payout means via the first distribution flow path, and distributes them to the ball entry delay means via the second distribution flow path.

According to the feature X3 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the gaming state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, since the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
The special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means which guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time before starting game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by firing the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature X4.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic X3 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (opening start port 83) for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game ball;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to accept a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to feature X4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X5.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic X4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted from being set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates the setting of a ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) which switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to feature X5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X6.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic X4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period in which a period until a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means is longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means which switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and which switches the game ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to feature X6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and for switching the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played, so that the player fires the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and does not fire the gaming ball aiming at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features X3 to X6 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
The game machine includes a swivel (swivel 81) having a swivel surface (swivel surface 812) for swivel- ing a game ball;
The Clune:
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guiding holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature X7 of the present invention group, the Kruun is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball revolving on the rotating surface to be guided to a specific ball entry means, and a non-guideable hole that prevents a game ball revolving on the rotating surface from being guided to a specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state is transitioned to a specific control state by the game state transition means, the time until the specific control start means starts playing in the specific control state can be delayed, and the configuration of the ball entry delay means can be simplified.

According to group X of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, and therefore can solve the following problems:

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures is known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big win lottery and starts variable display of pictures. For example, when a big win lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally stop and display a specific combination of pictures and the like, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable winning device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines have various components (gimmicks) in the gaming area, such as numerous nails planted in the gaming area to appropriately disperse the directions in which gaming balls fall, as well as windmills and other such components.

However, because gaming machines constantly distribute game balls using various components such as nails and windmills, the flow can become monotonous, which can lead to a decrease in players' interest in the game.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

1... Pachinko machine, 24... General winning opening, 25... Upper operating opening, 26... Lower operating opening, 27... Variable winning device, 271... Large winning opening, 272... Opening and closing door, 273... Variable winning drive unit, 28... Outlet, 35... Pattern display device, 4... Main control device, 42... MPU, 5... Sound and light emission control device, 52... MPU, 6... Display control device, 62... MPU.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with launching means for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, display means arranged corresponding to the gaming board and capable of executing a variable display of a plurality of symbols, and effect execution means capable of executing effects including a reach display effect in which a variable display is executed with a predetermined number of symbols displayed in a predetermined combination on the display means, and this gaming machine is equipped with a first start ball entry means into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and which serves as a trigger for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball, and a second start ball entry means different from the first start ball entry means into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and which serves as a trigger for executing a specific lottery based on the entry of the gaming ball. The game machine is provided with a ball means, and a reserved display means capable of displaying a number of reserved images for presentation corresponding to the reserved number of rights to a variable display reserved up to a predetermined upper limit when at least a game ball enters the first start ball entry means, and the variable displays that can be displayed in the variable display include a first variable display that is executed in response to the game ball entering the first start ball entry means, and a second variable display that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second start ball entry means, and the game machine is characterized in that a game is played more efficiently thereafter when a specific lottery based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means results in a specific advantageous result than when a specific lottery based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means results in a specific advantageous result. the display means is configured to easily generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, the display means is configured to display a predetermined suggestive information image at least in a plurality of first variable displays that are successively displayed, the display means is configured to execute display of a specific performance image corresponding to the second variable display in a state where the predetermined suggestive information image is displayed with a predetermined display content on the display means based on a shot into the second start shot means in a specific game state, the display means is configured to terminate display of the specific performance image being executed when a predetermined condition is established in a state where the predetermined suggestive information image is displayed with a predetermined display content on the display means, The display means is configured so that the display content of a predetermined suggestion information image can change from a predetermined display content to a specific display content while the display of a specific performance image is being executed, and this gaming machine is configured so that when the predetermined suggestion information image and the specific performance image are displayed on the display means, they are drawn and displayed so that they have different display priorities, and when a specific condition is met, a special performance image can be displayed following the specific performance image after the display of the specific performance image has ended, and when a special performance image is displayed, it is configured so that it is more likely to be of higher value to the player than when the special performance image is not displayed after the display of the specific performance image has ended.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising: a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the gaming area; and a gaming state transition means for transitioning a gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows a gaming ball to enter a first ball entry area that gives a first benefit to a player;
a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area that provides a tertiary benefit to the player that is smaller than the first benefit;
an operating member that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down the first flow path and an inoperative state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inoperative state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

Images